Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis

Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis
User Guide
Keysight M9018A
PXIe Chassis
Notices
© Keysight Technologies, Inc. 2014
Sales and Technical Support
Warranty
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means
(including electronic storage and retrieval
or translation into a foreign language)
without prior agreement and written consent from Keysight Technologies, Inc. as
governed by United States and international copyright laws.
To contact Keysight for sales and technical support, refer to the support links on
the following Keysight websites:
THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS
DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” AND
IS SUBJECT TO BEING CHANGED,
WITHOUT NOTICE, IN FUTURE EDITIONS. FURTHER, TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW, KEYSIGHT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND
ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED
HEREIN, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. KEYSIGHT
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR
FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE
FURNISHING, USE, OR PERFORMANCE
OF THIS DOCUMENT OR OF ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN. SHOULD
KEYSIGHT AND THE USER HAVE A SEPARATE WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH
WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE
MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT
CONFLICT WITH THESE TERMS, THE
WARRANTY TERMS IN THE SEPARATE
AGREEMENT SHALL CONTROL.
Manual Part Number
M9018-90005
Edition
Seventh Edition, September 2014
Published in U.S.A.
900 S. Taft Avenue
Loveland, CO. 80537
www.keysight.com/find/9018A (productspecific information and support, software and documentation updates)
www.keysight.com/find/assist (worldwide contact information for repair and
service)
Information on preventing damage to
your Keysight equipment can be found at
www.keysight.com/find/tips.
Declaration of Conformity
Declarations of Conformity for this product and for other Keysight products may
be downloaded from the Web. Go to
http://keysight.com/go/conformity and
click on “Declarations of Conformity.” You
can then search by product number to
find the latest Declaration of Conformity.
Technology Licenses
Trademarks
LabVIEW® is a registered trademark of
National Instruments.
PXI® is a registered trademark of the PXI
Systems Alliance.
PICMG®, Compact PCI®, and
AdvancedTCA® are registered trademarks of the PCI Industrial Computer
Manufacturers Group.
PCI-SIG®, PCI Express®, and PCIe® are
registered trademarks of PCI-SIG.
The hardware and/or software described
in this document are furnished under a
license and may be used or copied only in
accordance with the terms of such
license.
Keysight Technologies does not warrant
third-party system-level (combination of
chassis, controllers, modules, etc.) performance, safety, or regulatory compliance unless specifically stated.
DFARS/Restricted Rights
Notices
If software is for use in the performance
of a U.S. Government prime contract or
subcontract, Software is delivered and
licensed as “Commercial computer software” as defined in DFAR 252.227-7014
(June 1995), or as a “commercial item” as
defined in FAR 2.101(a) or as “Restricted
computer software” as defined in FAR
52.227-19 (June 1987) or any equivalent
agency regulation or contract clause.
Use, duplication or disclosure of Software
is subject to Keysight Technologies’ standard commercial license terms, and nonDOD Departments and Agencies of the
U.S. Government will receive no greater
than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR
52.227-19(c)(1-2) (June 1987). U.S. Government users will receive no greater
than Limited Rights as defined in FAR
52.227-14 (June 1987) or DFAR 252.2277015 (b)(2) (November 1995), as applicable in any technical data.
Safety Information
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all
phases of operation of this instrument.
Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings or operating instructions in the product
manuals violates safety standards of
design, manufacture, and intended use
of the instrument. Keysight Technologies assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these
requirements.
General
Do not use this product in any manner not
specified by the manufacturer. The protective features of this product must not be
impaired if it is used in a manner specified in
the operation instructions.
Before Applying Power
Verify that all safety precautions are taken.
Make all connections to the unit before
applying power. Note the external markings
described under “Safety Symbols”.
Ground the Instrument
Keysight chassis’ are provided with a
grounding-type power plug. The
instrument chassis and cover must be
connected to an electrical ground to
minimize shock hazard. The ground pin
must be firmly connected to an electrical ground (safety ground) terminal at
the power outlet. Any interruption of
the protective (grounding) conductor
or disconnection of the protective
earth terminal will cause a potential
shock hazard that could result in personal injury.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive
Atmosphere
Do not operate the module/chassis in
the presence of flammable gases or
fumes.
Do Not Operate Near Flammable
Liquids
Do not operate the module/chassis in
the presence of flammable liquids or
near containers of such liquids.
Cleaning
Clean the outside of the Keysight module/chassis with a soft, lint-free,
slightly dampened cloth. Do not use
detergent or chemical solvents.
iv
Do Not Remove Instrument Cover
Only qualified, service-trained personnel who are aware of the hazards
involved should remove instrument
covers. Always disconnect the power
cable and any external circuits before
removing the instrument cover.
Keep away from live circuits
Operating personnel must not remove
equipment covers or shields. Procedures involving the removal of covers
and shields are for use by servicetrained personnel only. Under certain
conditions, dangerous voltages may
exist even with the equipment
switched off. To avoid dangerous electrical shock, DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal
unless you are qualified to do so.
DO NOT operate damaged
equipment
Whenever it is possible that the safety
protection features built into this product have been impaired, either through
physical damage, excessive moisture,
or any other reason, REMOVE POWER
and do not use the product until safe
operation can be verified by servicetrained personnel. If necessary, return
the product to an Keysight Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure the safety
features are maintained.
DO NOT block the primary
disconnect
The primary disconnect device is the
appliance connector/power cord when
a chassis used by itself, but when
installed into a rack or system the disconnect may be impaired and must be
considered part of the installation.
Do Not Modify the Instrument
Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to
the product. Return the product to an
Keysight Sales and Service Office to
ensure that safety features are maintained.
In Case of Damage
Instruments that appear damaged or
defective should be made inoperative
and secured against unintended operation until they can be repaired by
qualified service personnel.
Do NOT block vents and fan exhaust:
To ensure adequate cooling and ventilation, leave a gap of at least 50mm
(2") around vent holes on both sides of
the chassis.
Do NOT operate with empty slots: To
ensure proper cooling and avoid damaging equipment, fill each empty slot
with an AXIe filler panel module.
Do NOT stack free-standing chassis:
Stacked chassis should be rackmounted.
All modules are grounded through the
chassis: During installation, tighten
each module's retaining screws to
secure the module to the chassis and
to make the ground connection.
Operator is responsible to maintain
safe operating conditions. To ensure
safe operating conditions, modules
should not be operated beyond the full
temperature range specified in the
Environmental and physical specification. Exceeding safe operating conditions can result in shorter lifespan,
improper module performance and
user safety issues. When the modules
are in use and operation within the
specified full temperature range is not
maintained, module surface temperatures may exceed safe handling conditions which can cause discomfort or
burns if touched. In the event of a
module exceeding the full temperature
range, always allow the module to cool
before touching or removing modules
from the chassis.
Safety Symbols
A CAUTION denotes a hazard. It
calls attention to an operating procedure or practice that, if not correctly performed or adhered to,
could result in damage to the
product or loss of important data.
Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION
notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
A WARNING denotes a hazard. It
calls attention to an operating procedure or practice, that, if not correctly performed or adhered to,
could result in personal injury or
death. Do not proceed beyond a
WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
Products display the following symbols:
Refer to manual for
additional safety
information.
The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association and indicates compliance to
the standards laid out by them. Refer
to the product Declaration of Conformity for details.
Notice for European Community: This
product complies with the relevant
European legal Directives: EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) and Low Voltage
Directive (2006/95/EC).
The Regulatory Compliance Mark
(RCM) mark is a registered trademark.
This signifies compliance with the Australia EMC Framework regulations
under the terms of the Radio Communication Act of 1992.
Earth Ground.
Chassis Ground.
ICES/NMB-001 indicates that this ISM
device complies with the Canadian
ICES-001.
Standby Power. Unit is not
completely disconnected
from AC mains when
power switch is in standby
position
Waste Electrical and
Electronic
Equipment (WEEE)
Directive
2002/96/EC
This product complies with the WEEE
Directive (2002/96/EC) marking
requirement. The affixed product label
(see below) indicates that you must not
discard this electrical/electronic product in domestic household waste.
Product Category: With reference to
the equipment types in the WEEE
directive Annex 1, this product is classified as a “Monitoring and Control
instrumentation” product.
Do not dispose in domestic household
waste.
Alternating Current (AC).
Direct Current (DC).
South Korean Class A EMC Declaration. this equipment is Class A suitable
for professional use and is for use in
electromagnetic environments outside
of the home.
This symbol represents the time period
during which no hazardous or toxic
substance elements are expected to
leak or deteriorate during normal use.
Forty years is the expected useful life
of this product.
To return unwanted products, contact
your local Keysight office, or see
www.keysight.com/environment/product for more information.
Indicates that antistatic
precautions should be
taken.
Operate the PXIe chassis
in the horizontal
orientation. Do NOT
operate this chassis in the
vertical orientation.
v
vi
Contents
1 Introduction
About this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
M9018A Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Chassis maintenance and inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Module handling procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installing modules in the chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2 Power Supply Operation
Voltage rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Power supply capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Over temperature protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Temperature derating of the primary power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Power calculator spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Overcurrent protection of the 5V and 12V rails maximum PPM . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Short circuit protection of the 5V and 12V rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Short circuit protection of the 3.3V rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Monitoring of the 3.3V rail by the chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Internal fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Measuring the four main voltage rails directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3 Chassis Cooling and Rack Mounting
Overview of chassis cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Rack mounting of the chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4 Chassis and Host Controller Power Up/Down Sequence
Power sequence requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite 16.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
vii
PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite 16.1 or later . . . . . . . . . . 26
Performing a system restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Performing a chassis hard reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5 Overview of Chassis Management Capabilities
Summary of chassis management capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Enabling use of the SFP to configure chassis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
The chassis alarm architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6 Viewing the Chassis Revision and Updating Firmware
Viewing the chassis revision information using the SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Viewing the chassis revision information using the IVI drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chassis firmware revision checking and installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7 The Chassis Alarm Architecture
Relationship between Alarm Occurred and the front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . 37
Power-on default alarm thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Events which re-establish the power-on default thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
The SFP alarm thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
8 Monitoring Fan Speeds
9 Monitoring the Chassis Temperature
10 Setting the Fan Speed vs. Chassis Temperature Profile
11 Monitoring the Power Supply Rails
12 Monitoring the 10 MHz Reference Clock Source
Monitoring the 10 MHz clock source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
13 Configuring the PXI Trigger Bus
Configuring PXI trigger bus connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Using the SFP to configure PXI trigger bus connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Using the IVI drivers to configure trigger bus connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
14 Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Selecting a Link Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Configuring the chassis to run at Gen 1 speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
viii
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Reconfiguration failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Restoring operation after an interruption of the configuration process . . . 85
Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base Configuration . . . . . . . . 87
15 Performing a Chassis Self Test
Performing self test using the IVI drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Self test codes and messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Low-numbered self test codes (service typically is required) . . . . . . . . . . . 95
High numbered self test codes (situation may be customer resolvable) . . 96
16 Troubleshooting the M9018A System
Overarching objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Quick troubleshooting tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting system exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception #1: Chassis doesn’t power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception #2: Abnormal fan behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception #3: Abnormal behavior of the front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception #4: Chassis alarm(s) are set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception #5: Self test completes with messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception #6: Host controller PC can’t communicate to the chassis . . . .
102
102
103
103
103
104
105
106
106
17 Troubleshooting Failure of the Chassis to Power Up
Behavior of a powered up chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Power supply background information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply and fan architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying the power supply version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting failure of the chassis to power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify AC power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshoot the power up hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove and re-install modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshoot the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply troubleshooting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
108
109
111
111
111
113
113
114
18 Troubleshooting Fan Issues
Fan background information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Troubleshooting fan issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fan troubleshooting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
ix
19 Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs
Troubleshooting abnormal LED behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
All three LEDs alternately blink for 1/3 Second then chassis shuts down 123
Troubleshooting out-of-limits power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Troubleshooting chassis temperatures that are over the maximum temperature
threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
20 Troubleshooting the Chassis Alarms
Troubleshooting the chassis alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
21 Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results
Low-numbered codes (service is typically required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
High numbered self test codes (situation may be customer resolvable). . 132
22 Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
M9018A system components and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Host controller PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Tested computer list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Keysight IO Libraries Suite and the chassis drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
PCIe slots and speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
M9018A chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
M9021A Cable Interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Windows Device Manager and Connection Expert views of the PCIe devices
149
23 Repairing the Chassis
Ordering the fan assembly and power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Tools that you’ll need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Important aspects of the repair process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Removing the rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Replacing the fan assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Verifying the fan assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Replacing the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Installing the new power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Verifying the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
x
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
A How to Return the Chassis to Keysight
Failure information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
B Chassis and Accessory Model Numbers
C Chassis Temperature Parameters
Index
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
xi
xii
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
1
Introduction
The 18-slot Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis has these key features:
- Contains an advanced PCIe switch fabric that operates at PCI Express
Generation 2 (“Gen 2”) speeds.
- Provides a mix of x4 and x8 links to the module slots. At Gen 2 speeds, the x8
links can deliver data to modules at 4 GB/s when connected to an x8-capable
computer. Module-to-module communications are also supported at 4 GB/s
for modules installed in x8 capable slots.
- Supports multiple chassis. There are several possible ways to configure
multiple M9018A PXIe and M9502A 2-Slot and M9505A 5-Slot AXIe chassis
together; all of them controlled by a single host controller. The host controller
can be either a PXIe Embedded Controller (such as the Keysight M9036A) or a
desktop or rack-mounted computer. For detailed multiple PXIe and AXIe
chassis arrangement information, refer to Keysight's Multiple PXIe and AXIe
Chassis Configuration tool. This tool is available on the M9018A Product
information CD as well as on line at:
www.keysight.com/find/pxie-multichassis.
- A system timing module can be installed in the chassis to provide advanced
trigger signals to all slots.
1
Introduction
About this Guide
About this Guide
This User Guide provides detailed information on using the M9018A chassis,
including the following:
- How to configure the M9018A chassis to meet your needs. Parameters such
as the following can be configured:
– The PCIe link configuration: 1x8, 2x8, or 4x4
– Voltage limits around the power supply rails at which an alarm will be
generated if a rail falls outside of its limit
– The temperature at which an alarm will be generated if the chassis
exceeds this temperature
– The fan speed at which an alarm will be generated if a fan speed falls
below this limit
- How to ensure that your modules don’t exceed the chassis power supply
capacity.
- Rack mounting of the chassis
- How to diagnose and troubleshoot issues with the chassis
- How to replace the power supply or the fan assembly
It is assumed that you have used the M9018A Startup Guide to turn on the
chassis system, including installing the Keysight IO Libraries Suite, the chassis
drivers, and the chassis soft front panel. If the chassis has not yet been turned
on, please use the Startup Guide to perform the initial chassis turn on prior to
configuring the chassis as described in this guide.
If you have been unable to turn on the chassis system using the M9018A
Startup Guide and need assistance, please see “Troubleshooting M9018A
System Turn On Issues” on page 139. This appendix provides step-by-step
guidance on turning on the chassis system.
If you are still unable to turn on the chassis system, see “Troubleshooting the
M9018A System” on page 99. Note that having ready access to certain spare
parts may accelerate the troubleshooting process. Chapter 16 includes a list of
spare parts that you may want to acquire to support any repairs that are ever
needed.
2
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
About this Guide
Introduction
Before continuing, some important terminology is presented. The computer that
controls the chassis is known as the host controller or system controller, and is
shown at the top of the hierarchy in Figure 2:
Host Controller
(System Controller)
Remote Controller
(connects to chassis
through a PCIe cable)
Embedded Controller
(installs in slot 1
of chassis)
Desktop PC
Laptop PC
Rack-mounted PC
Figure 1
The host controller, remote controller, and embedded controller
hierarchy
The host controller can either be a remote controller or an embedded controller.
A remote controller is a Windows-based PC, and can be a desktop PC, a laptop
PC, or a rack mounted PC. The remote controller interfaces to the chassis
through a PCIe cable.
An embedded controller, such as the Keysight M9036A Embedded Controller, is
a small form factor, Windows-based PC that is designed for installation in the
system controller slot (slot 1) of the chassis. An embedded controller also
consumes two or three expansion slots to the left of slot 1.
The combination of the chassis, the host controller (and a PCIe cable if the host
controller is a remote controller), and the chassis I/O software running on the
host controller is referred to as a chassis system.
In order for a PC to serve as a remote controller, its BIOS must support
enumeration of the PCIe slots in the chassis; many computers are not capable
of enumerating a sufficient number of PCIe slots to ensure that slots in an
external chassis are enumerated.
Keysight provides the document “PCI and AXIe Modular Instrumentation Tested
Computer List Technical Note” which lists the embedded, desktop, laptop, and
rack-mounted PCs that have been verified to enumerate the PCIe slots in the
M9018A chassis. Please use this document, available under the Document
Library tab at www.keysight.com/find/M9018A, to guide your selection of
remote controller PCs.
For general PC requirements, such as operating system and RAM requirements,
please see the section “Software Requirements” in the M9018A Startup Guide.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
3
Introduction
M9018A Block Diagram
M9018A Block Diagram
The M9018A block diagram (non-interactive) from the Startup Guide is
presented on the next page. Please see the Startup Guide for a description of the
key elements on the diagram and for information on how to use the interactive
features. View the complete interactive block diagram from the Windows Start
button:
Start > All Programs > Keysight > M9018 > M9018 Block Diagram
You can also view the block diagram on the Software and Product Information
CD or you can download the block diagram from
www.keysight.com/find/M9018A.
4
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A Block Diagram
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Introduction
5
PCIe 2-Link and 4-Link Configurations
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis
Links used of the two x8 links available
Link 1 Link 2
Possible
PCIe 2-Link
Configurations
1x8
2x8
Total number of
x8 links used
Factory
default
Please place your mouse
over this rounded rectangle
to view information
about this diagram.
Clear
1x8
Lanes per link
PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator
This program can be used to set the
User Configuration to 2x8 or 4x4
(and point the virtual switch to the
User Configuration), or point the
switch to the Base Configuration.
2x8
Links used of the four x4 links available
Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4
4x4
1x4
Possible 2x4
PCIe 4-Link
Configurations 3x4
4x4
Total number of
x4 links used
Front panel
ON/Standby
pushbutton
Lanes per link
START HERE
Show PCIe Link Configurations
Factory
User Configuration
Base Configuration: 1x8 default,
read-only
User
Base
virtual switch
When the host controller PC boots, it asserts its PCIe
Reset signal which causes the User or Base Configuration
to be loaded into the PCIe Switch Fabric, depending on the
virtual switch position.
x8
x4
x4
x4
x8
x1
x1
x4
x4
Load Base
Configuration
Pushbutton
x4
Eight backplane
temperature sensors
PCIe Switch Fabric
x4
x8
x4
x1
x4
x4
x8
x4
x4
x4
Show Host Controller Software
Clear
Keysight Connection Expert
XP4
XP4
XP4
Soft Front Panel
XP3
XP3
PCIe
ExpressCard
Adapter (x1)
Y1200B
PCIe cable: x1 to x8
connectors, 2.0m
XP3
PXI_CLK10_IN
Development environments
XP2
TP2
XP1
TP1
XJ1
PCIe
Y1202A
Desktop
Adapter (x8) PCIe cable: x8,
2.0m
ON/Standby pushbutton power activation signal
PCIe Cable
Interface (x8)
In
Show Clocks
Show
SMBus
Slot 7
PXIe_CLK100
Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6
Hybrid Slots
Slot 1
System
Controller
Slot
Remote Controllers
Clear
PXIe_SYNC100
10 MHZ
OUTPUT
10
PLL
FEEDBACK
PXIe_SYNC100
Slot 10
10 MHZ
REF OUT
(rear panel
BNC)
PLL
10 MHZ
INPUT
x1
Chassis firmware
(customer upgradeable)
Chassis Manager
VCXO Chassis
Input 10 MHz
Select Correction
Signal
Slot 13 Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18
Hybrid Slots
Show Triggers
Show Boards Supported
by the Hybrid Slots
Clear
Show Hybrid Slot Pin Outs
PXI_TRIG[0:7]
PXI_STAR[0:16]
C20 power connector
(rear panel)
PXIe_DSTAR A/B/C[0:16]
PXI_CLK10_IN
Chassis
EPROM
Slot 11 Slot 12
System
Timing Slot
Clock
Generator
PXI_CLK10
PXIe_CLK100
Slot 9
PXI_CLK10
Sync
Generator
VCXO
Slot 8
10 MHZ REF IN
(rear panel BNC)
10 MHz
Input
Select
To module
slots and
chassis
electronics
5Vaux
5Vaux
3.3V
5V
12V
-12V
Primary
Power Module
(PPM) ON
Monitor
Processor
5Vstandby
Fan Monitor
and Control
Power
Supply
Embedded
Controller
INHIBIT/VOLTAGE MON
(rear panel)
INHIBIT
(rear panel)
DEF
Fan 12V
Show Chassis Views
(default)
MAN
(manual)
Clear
FAN
(rear panel)
Front View
© Keysight
sight Technologies,
Technologies Inc
Inc. 2012,
2012 2013
20 , 2014
September 2014 M9018-90006
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
Rear View
HIGH
AUTO
Fan assembly
6
ON/Standby
pushbutton
power activation
signal
Inhibit
(low = off)
DB-9 Connector
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Logic ground
+5 VDC
Reserved
+3.3 VDC
Inhibit (active low)
+12 VDC
Reserved
-12 VDC
Logic ground
Chassis maintenance and inspection
Chassis maintenance and inspection
- This is a Safety Class 1 Prod uct (provided with a protective earthing ground
incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only be inserted in a
socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact. Any interruption of
the protective cond uctor inside or outside of the prod uct is likely to make
the product dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited. Inspect the
protective cond uctor period ically to ensure that it is uninterrupted.
- No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
To prevent electrical shock, do not remove covers.
- To prevent electrical shock, d isconnect the chassis power cord before
cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the
external case parts. Do not attempt to clean internally.
- Cleaning connectors with alcohol shall only be done with the chassis power
cord removed and in a well-ventilated area. Allow all resid ual alcohol
moisture to evaporate, and the fumes to d issipate prior to energizing the
chassis.
No periodic maintenance of the chassis is required. However, Keysight
recommends monitoring the following chassis parameters on an ongoing basis:
- Power supply voltages—The four main power supply rails (3.3V, 5V, 12V, and
–12V) should all be within ±5% of their nominal values. Keysight recommends
checking the power rails at least yearly using the chassis soft front panel
(SFP) or programmatically. In addition, the power rails are accessible on the
rear panel DB-9 connector, and can be checked with a DMM as described in
“Measuring the four main voltage rails directly” on page 18.
- Fan speeds—The chassis has three fans located at the rear of the chassis. A
low fan speed possibly indicates that a fan is wearing out or a fan blade is
partially obstructed. Keysight recommends using the chassis SFP to check
the fan speeds yearly as well.
- Chassis firmware—Keysight recommends that you periodically check to see if
there is a chassis firmware revision available that is later than your chassis
firmware revision. If so, it is suggested that you download and install the latest
firmware revision available as described in “Chassis firmware revision
checking and installation” on page 34.
If a power supply voltage is out of tolerance or a fan speed is low, please see
“Troubleshooting the M9018A System” on page 99 for diagnostic information
and troubleshooting tips.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
7
Module handling procedures
Module handling procedures
To avoid electrostatic discharge damage when handling modules, please read
and follow the guidelines provided below.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy electronic components.
Keysight modules and interface cards are shipped in materials which prevent
static electricity damage. These items should only be unpacked and inspected
at a static-safe work station. The following figure shows an example of a
static-safe work station which uses the following two ESD protection methods:
- Conductive table-mat and
wrist-strap combination.
- Conductive floor-mat and heel-strap
combination.
ESD protection accessories can be
purchased from numerous electronics
suppliers.
Both ESD protection methods listed above, when used together, provide a
significant level of protection. Of the two methods, only the table-mat and
wrist-strap combination (method 1) provides adequate ESD protection when
used alone. To ensure user safety, the static-safe accessories must provide at
least 1 M of isolation from ground.
To avoid damaging components when unpacking or handling a module, do not
touch the module connector pins or the components on the printed circuit
board. Store all modules and interface cards in anti-static envelopes when not
in use.
Additional information on preventing damage to your Keysight equipment can
be found at www.keysight.com/find/tips.
8
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Installing modules in the chassis
Installing modules in the chassis
To install a module in the chassis, perform the following steps:
1 Turn the chassis off and unplug the chassis from AC power.
2 Before inserting the module, inspect the chassis slot to ensure there are no
bent pins on the slot connectors.
- To avoid damaging the module, do not touch exposed connectors or
components on the printed circuit board as you install the module.
- Modules are usually shipped with thread protectors on the mounting screw
threads. These protectors must be removed before installing modules in the
chassis.
3 Insert the module in the chassis slot by placing the module card edges into
the top and bottom module guides.
Take care to ensure that the module is aligned perpendicularly to the chassis as
you begin sliding it in. Otherwise, it’s possible for components on the module
(or on adjacent modules) to be damaged by contact between modules.
4 With the injector/ejector handle in the down position, carefully slide the
module to the rear of the chassis. When you begin to feel resistance from the
backplane connectors, push up on the injector/ejector handle to complete
insertion of the module and latch it into place.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
9
Installing modules in the chassis
5 Secure the module front panel to the chassis using the captive front panel
mounting screws. All modules have two captive mounting screws. Tighten the
screws for both mechanical security and to ensure proper grounding of the
front panel.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that all empty chassis slots are covered by filler panels or air
inlet modules.
6 Plug in and power up the chassis. Verify that the chassis fans are operating
and free of obstructions that may restrict airflow.
10
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
2
Power Supply Operation
This chapter describes operation of the chassis power supply, and includes the
following topics:
- Vol tage rails—Describes each of the voltage rails supported by the chassis.
- Power supply capacity—Describes how much power can be drawn from each
voltage rail.
- Over temperature protection—Describes how the power supply responds to an
over temperature condition.
- Temperature derating of the primary power module—Indicates how the power
capacity of the primary power module (which provides 5 VDC and 12 VDC) is
derated with temperature.
- Overcurrent protection—Describes how the power supply responds to an
overcurrent condition.
- Short circuit protection—Describes how the power supply responds to a short
circuit condition.
- Monitoring of the 3.3V rail by the chassis—Describes how the chassis monitors the
3.3V rail at power-on, and how the voltage limits are expanded by the
IVI-COM driver.
- Measuring of the four primary vol tage rails—The four primary voltage rails (3.3V,
5V, 12V, and –12V) can be measured on the chassis rear panel DB-9
connector. The voltage rail pin assignments on this connector are listed.
11
Power Supply Operation
Voltage rails
Voltage rails
The M9018A power supply provides the six voltage rails listed below. The name
of each voltage rail as it appears on the chassis backplane connectors is shown
in the second column—these names are used in this guide for brevity. Figure 2 on
the next page shows these voltage rails in a block diagram format, and describes
the power available from each rail.
Note that two of the rails, 5 VDC auxiliary and Fan 12 VDC, are active (powered)
whenever the chassis is connected to AC power. The remaining rails are switch
on/off either by the front panel power pushbutton or by the INHIBIT signal on the
rear panel DB-9 connector.
Table 1
Power supply voltage rails.
Vol tage rail
Backplane
name
Comments
3.3 VDC
3.3V
This voltage rail is generated by a DC-to-DC converter operating from the 12 VDC rail.*
5 VDC
5V
The 5 VDC rail connects to the 5V pins
of the CompactPCI XP1 connector.
As shown by the backplane names, this rail
connects to the backplane under two different
names.*
The 5 VDC rail also connects to the 5V
V(I/O) pins of the CompactPCI XP1
connector.
5V V(I/O)
5 VDC auxiliary
5Vaux
This rail provides standby power to the Monitor Processor and the modules, and is
available anytime the chassis is connected to AC power.
12 VDC
12V
This rail and the 5 VDC rail can both be switched on/off, either by the front panel power
pushbutton or the INHIBIT signal on the rear panel DB-9 connector.*
–12 VDC
–12V
As with the 3.3 VDC rail, this rail is generated by a DC-to-DC converter operating from
the 12 VDC rail.*
Fan 12 VDC
Fan 12V
This rail supplies the fan driver circuitry, and is not connected to the backplane
connectors. This power supply is active anytime the chassis is connected to AC power.
* The 3.3VDC, 5VDC, 12 VDC, and the –12VDC rails can be switched on/off, either by the front panel power pushbutton or by the INHIBIT
signal on the rear panel DB-9 connector. The 3.3VDC and –12VDC rail regulators are fed by the +12VDC.
12
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Power supply capacity
Power Supply Operation
Power supply capacity
Figure 2 shows the maximum power available from each rail. The rails cannot all
provide their maximum power simultaneously to the modules in the chassis.
Therefore, tradeoffs are required to ensure that certain maximum power limits
aren’t exceeded, as described below.
The Fan 12 VDC rail supplies power to the fan driver
circuitry. The power consumed from this rail depends on
the duty cycle of the drive signal to the fans, which ranges
from 40% to 100%. At 100% duty cycle, the fans consume
60 watts.
7.5 watts
5 VDC auxiliary
Fan
12 VDC
5Vaux
rail
High line =
220-240V
50/60 Hz
Low line =
100-120 V
12 VDC
rail
Primary
Power
Module
(PPM)
5 VDC
rail
High line
maximum
power =
860 watts
Low line
maximum
power =
71 watts
61 watts
51.3 amps
61 watts
12 VDC
3.3 VDC
DC-to-DC
converter
200 watts
3.3 VDC
–12 VDC
DC-to-DC
converter
48 watts
–12 VDC
5V VIO
294 watts
5 VDC
58.8 amps
The maximum power available from each rail is displayed in a rounded rectangle. For example, the maximum power
available from the 12 VDC rail is 615 watts, while the maximum power available from the 5 VDC rail is 294 watts, both
shown in green and provided by the Primary Power Module (PPM). The sum of the two green powers cannot exceed the
maximum power available from the PPM (which itself depends on the AC voltage). For example, at low line AC (100120V), the total power drawn from the PPM cannot exceed 717 watts. This means that, at low line AC, your modules
cannot consume the sum of the maximum powers shown in green, i.e. 615 watts + 294 watts = 909 watts.
At low line, if your modules consume, for example, 500 watts from 12 VDC, your modules cannot exceed 21 watts from
5 VDC (71 watts – 500 watts = 21 watts). However, at high line AC (220-240V), 860 watts are available from the PPM,
meaning that the full 615 watts are available from the 12 VDC rail and the full 294 watts are available from the 5 VDC rail
(566 watts + 294 watts = 860 watts).
Similarly, the sum of the three powers in yellow cannot exceed the upstream green (12 VDC) maximum power, namely
566 watts. This means that your modules cannot consume the sum of the maximum powers shown in yellow, i.e. 566
watts + 200 watts + 48 watts = 814 watts.
The 5 VDC auxiliary rail can provide 7.5 watts of standby power to the modules under both high line and low line
conditions. The Fan 12 VDC supply provides up to 60 watts to the fans.
Figure 2
The maximum power available to the modules from each rail*
* The +12 volt power specification and total low line DC output power specification apply to Keysight M9018A
chassis with serial number TW52450100 and later.Prior chassis limited the +12 Vdc to 566 W and the total
low line DC output power to 660 W.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
13
Power Supply Operation
Over temperature protection
Over temperature protection
The Primary Power Module (PPM) will shut down if its internal temperature
exceeds 115 °C. This not only shuts down the 5 VDC and 12 VDC rails, but also
shuts down the 3.3 VDC and –12 VDC rails because they are generated from the
12 VDC rail.
If the chassis is operating within its normal ambient temperature range of 0-55
°C and is operating within the power limits described previously, an over
temperature condition is unlikely to occur. Therefore, if the chassis appears to
be powered down (for example, based on the front panel LEDs being off), you
should consider other possible causes prior to considering an over temperature
condition. Please see “Troubleshooting the M9018A System” on page 99 for
further information.
Note that it is not possible to determine the temperature of the PPM based on
the temperatures reported by the eight temperature sensors—the PPM and the
eight temperature sensors have different ventilation airflows.
To recover from a suspected over temperature shutdown, the PPM internal
temperature must be below 115 °C and the chassis must be power cycled. Power
cycling of the chassis should be performed by detaching and re-attaching the
power cord because neither the front panel ON/OFF pushbutton nor the Inhibit
signal on the rear panel DB-9 connector will function if the PPM is shut down.
If the chassis is power cycled but does not resume operation, either the PPM was
not at fault or the PPM internal temperature is still above 115 °C. Additional
cooling time should be allowed followed by another power cycle to see if that
resolves the problem.
14
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Temperature derating of the primary power module
Power Supply Operation
Temperature derating of the primary power module
At ambient temperatures of 45 °C and above, the power available from the PPM
is derated as shown in Figure 3 (low-line) and in Figure 4 (high-line).
1,000
Maximum PPM power
that can be consumed by
all modules at low-line
Power consumption (W)
900
Low-Line (100-120V)
800
710 watts
700
600
522.5 watts
500
400
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
Ambient temperature external to the chassis (°C)
Figure 3
Module power consumption vs. temperature at low-line
(100-120V)*
1,000
Maximum PPM power
that can be consumed by
all modules at high-line
Power coonsumption (W)
900
860 watts
800
700
635 watts
600
Hi h Li (220-240V)
High-Line
(220 240V)
500
400
0
Figure 4
5
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Ambient temperature external to the chassis (°C)
55
Module power consumption vs. temperature at high-line (220-240V)
* This chart is valid for Keysight M9018A chassis with serial number TW52450100 and later. Chassis with prior
serial numbers limited the maximum power consumption to 660 W and derated to 485 W at 55 °C.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
15
Power Supply Operation
Power calculator spreadsheet
Power calculator spreadsheet
The Microsoft Excel power calculator spreadsheet is available on the M9018A
Software and Product Information CD under the label M9018A Power Spreadsheet.
This spreadsheet allows you to enter the following information and determine if
the chassis will be operating within its power limits:
1 The ambient temperature that the chassis will be operating at—as noted in the
previous section, the ambient temperature affects the power available to the
modules from the power supply.
2 The mains voltage of the chassis, either low line (100-120V) or high line
(220-240V).
3 The power consumed on each rail by each module.
After the above information is entered, the spreadsheet will indicate if any power
supply limits are exceeded.
Overcurrent protection of the 5V and 12V rails maximum PPM
The PPM has overcurrent protection on its two rails, 5V and 12V. Overcurrent
protection can occur at currents from 110% of the maximum current available up
to 140% of the maximum current available. For example, overcurrent protection
on the 5V rail can occur anywhere from 65.3 amps (110% of 59.4 amps, the
maximum current available on 5V) up to 83.2 amps (140% of 59.4 amps).
Overcurrent protection of the 5V and 12V rails are independent of each other. For
example, an overcurrent situation on the 5V rail will not affect operation of the
12V rail.
In response to an overcurrent condition on a rail, the PPM will momentarily shut
down that rail and then attempt to resume operation. If the overcurrent condition
is still present, the PPM will again momentarily shut down, and so on, until the
overcurrent condition is no longer present.
In response to an overcurrent situation, modules (especially high-powered
modules) should be removed one at a time to see if that resolves the situation.
Short circuit protection of the 5V and 12V rails
The PPM response to a short circuit condition is the same as its response to an
overcurrent condition—the PPM will momentarily shut down the affected rail and
then attempt to resume operation. If the short circuit condition is still present,
the PPM will again momentarily shut down, and so on, until the short circuit
condition is no longer present.
16
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Short circuit protection of the 3.3V rail
Power Supply Operation
Short circuit protection of the 3.3V rail
In the event of a short circuit on the 3.3V rail, two steps are required to restore
operation: (1) The short circuit condition needs to be eliminated and (2) the
chassis needs to be power cycled before the 3.3V supply will resume operation.
Monitoring of the 3.3V rail by the chassis
The 3.3V rail power supply ensures that its voltage is regulated to within ±5% of
3.3V on the backplane. In ensuring that the backplane 3.3V is within
specification, it’s possible for the 3.3V rail to be greater than 5% above 3.3V
where the voltage measurement occurs in the chassis. If the 3.3V rail exceeds the
±5% limit, the chassis front panel Power LED will flash.
Accordingly, when the IVI-C or IVI-COM driver first communicates with the
chassis, the driver will modify the 3.3V limit to be ±10% around 3.3V instead of
±5%. At this point, if the LED was flashing due to the 3.3V rail exceeding the 5%
limit, the flashing should cease and the LED should turn on continuously.
Because the SFP uses the IVI-COM driver, bringing up the SFP also triggers this
initial communications with the chassis and modifies the 3.3V limits to be ±10%
around 3.3V. If the Power LED was flashing prior to starting the SFP and then the
LED turns on continuously after the SFP starts, the termination of flashing is very
likely due to the software-driven expansion of the 3.3V limits from ±5% to ±10%.
Having the wider (±10%) limits is not an issue because, as mentioned previously,
the chassis ensures that the 3.3V rail is within specifications on the backplane
itself.
If the IVI-C or IVI-COM driver (including the SFP) establishes contact with the
chassis, but the Power LED continues to flash, or if software is unable to make
contact with the chassis, the problem is likely unrelated to the 3.3V rail.
Internal fuses
Each supply connected directly to AC is protected by an internal fuse. These
fuses are not customer- replaceable, please contact Keysight if you suspect a
fuse is blown.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
17
Power Supply Operation
Measuring the four main voltage rails directly
Measuring the four main voltage rails directly
The four main voltage rails can be measured on the DB-9 connector on the
chassis rear panel using a digital multi-meter. The voltage rail pin assignments
are shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5
3.3V, 5V, 12V, and –12V pin assignments
Each voltage rail contains a current limiting resistor to prevent accidentally
shorting the supplies during measurements.
18
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
3
Chassis Cooling and Rack
Mounting
This chapter describes chassis cooling and rack mounting of the chassis. These
topics are presented together so that chassis cooling can be considered when
rack mounting the chassis.
Overview of chassis cooling
The key points regarding chassis cooling are:
- The chassis is cooled by three 186 cubic feet per minute (CFM) fans, providing
a total airflow of up to 558 CFM.
- The fans are mounted on the chassis rear panel and exhaust air out the rear of
the chassis. The air intakes are in the front, sides and bottom of the chassis.
- A minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) of clearance should be provided in the front,
rear and sides of the chassis for ventilation. Depending on module power
consumption, clearance may also be needed below the chassis to
accommodate the air intakes on the bottom of the chassis. This is discussed
further in the next section.
- The fans can either be set to operate at maximum speed, or can be set so that
the fan speeds are a function of the chassis temperature. With the latter
capability, you can specify the fan speed vs. temperature profile using either
the soft front panel (SFP) or programmatically using the IVI drivers.
- The chassis contains eight temperature sensors mounted to the top of the
backplane to allow you to monitor the temperatures in the airflow
downstream from the modules. These temperatures can be read using the
SFP or programmatically. Please see “Monitoring the Chassis Temperature”
on page 45 for information on the sensor locations and how to read their
temperatures.
19
Chassis Cooling and Rack Mounting
Rack mounting of the chassis
Rack mounting of the chassis
This section describes how to rack mount the chassis.
- Chassis should never be stacked on top of each other. To position chassis
vertically, they should be rack mounted as described in this chapter.
- In handling the chassis in preparation for rack mounting, do not stand the
chassis on its side; the side handles can cause the chassis to tip over.
- Depending on the power consumed by the chassis, a 1U space may be
required below the chassis to ensure adequate ventilation for cooling. Be sure
to provide this space if required as described in this chapter.
The weight of an empty M9018A PXIe chassis (no modules installed in the
chassis) is approximately 34 lbs (15.5 kg). Lift the chassis using a single side
handle only when the total chassis weight (chassis plus installed modules) does
not exceed 75 lbs (34.0 kg). Otherwise use both side handles to lift the chassis.
Two people may be required to lift the chassis and install it in a rack.
Installing modules in the chassis may increase its weight to a point where two
people are required to lift the chassis. If two people are not available, use a
mechanical lift to lift the chassis. The chassis should be transported using a
rolling cart.
To rack mount the chassis, order the Y1215A Rack Mount Kit. This kit provides
the hardware and instructions to mount the chassis in a standard 482.6 mm (19
inch) wide rack. In rack mounting the chassis, follow these guidelines:
1 Always begin installing chassis at the bottom of the rack and work up. This
maintains a lower center of gravity and reduces the likelihood of the rack
tipping.
2 Anti-tipping feet, if available with the rack, should always be extended.
3 The heaviest chassis should always be mounted in the bottom of the rack.
4 For maximum cooling and optimum rack thermal efficiency, place the chassis
with the greatest power consumption towards the top of the rack. This
promotes efficient cooling since heat rises. When placed nearer to the top of
the rack, high power chassis will not unnecessarily heat other chassis.
However, in doing this, do not violate the guideline that the heaviest chassis
be placed at the bottom of the rack.
5 As described in “Power Supply Operation” on page 11, the maximum power
that can be supplied to the modules is 849 watts. If your modules are
consuming the maximum power, 1U of space is required for ventilation below
the chassis when you rack mount it.
20
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
4
Chassis and Host Controller
Power Up/Down Sequence
This chapter describes the chassis and host controller PC power up and power
down sequences. In order for the chassis and the host controller PC to
interoperate correctly, they must be powered up and down in specific
sequences. Furthermore, the PC must be restarted in certain situations after the
chassis and PC are powered up. If these sequences aren’t followed, the PC may
not be able to access the chassis or the modules in the chassis.
The chassis has three power states: Powered up, powered down, and
unplugged. When powered up, the chassis is fully operational. When powered
down, the Primary Power Module (described in “Power Supply Operation” on
page 11) is turned off, but 5Vaux is available to the Monitor Processor and the
modules. When unplugged, the chassis is completely unpowered. Unless
otherwise stated, the chassis is presumed to be plugged in, and is changing
power states between powered up and powered down.
When you press the chassis power-on button, if the chassis does not power up
and the front panel LEDs do not light, it is possible for the chassis to be in a
safety shutdown state. Remove the chassis AC power cord from the chassis for
one minute. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the chassis again. If it still
does not power on, refer to the troubleshooting information later in the manual.
This chapter also describes differences in starting up the host controller PC
based on the version of Keysight IO Libraries Suite installed on your system
controller.
21
Chassis and Host Controller Power Up/Down Sequence
Power sequence requirements
Power sequence requirements
When powering-up the system, the chassis should be powered up first. After
powering up the chassis, you should wait at least three seconds before turning
on a remote PC. The chassis front panel temperature LED, which is on for three
seconds after the chassis is powered up, provides a convenient way to measure
this delay, as shown below.
Chassis power
((High
g = powered
p
up)
p)
Chassis front panel
temperature LED
The temperature LED, which is on for the first three seconds after
the chassis is powered up, can be used as an indicator of when to
turn on the PC – when the LED turns off, the PC can be turned on.
Remote Controller PC
(High = turned on)
The chassis must be
powered up before the
PC is turned on to
ensure that the PC
BIOS will enumerate
the chassis slots as
the PC boots.
It is recommended that the PC be shut
down before the chassis is powered
down because many PCs don’t have the
capability to safely remove (eject) PCIeconnected devices. Therefore, powering
poweringdown the chassis first can disrupt
operation of the PC.
Figure 6 Wait three seconds after powering up the chassis before turning on
the PC
The PC should be shut down before the chassis is powered down. This will
prevent the chassis, as it’s being powered down, from disrupting operation of the
PC.
In brief, the PC should be off whenever the chassis is powered up or down.
Because chassis modules are not hot-swappable, chassis modules should only
be added or removed when the chassis is powered down.
The above power sequence doesn’t apply to an embedded controller installed in
the chassis because the embedded controller and chassis are powered together.
22
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite
Chassis and Host Controller Power Up/Down Sequence
PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite
This section describes the PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite,
versions 16.0 and 16.1 (and later). Improvements have been made in Keysight IO
Libraries Suite 16.1 that considerably simplify the PC startup process, which is
why Keysight recommends use of version 16.1 or later.
Before describing the PC startup events for each version, two situations are
described where Connection Expert, which is part of Keysight IO Libraries Suite,
won’t display a PCIe device, be it the chassis or a module in the chassis.
1 If Windows can’t find a driver for a device, Windows won’t be able to identify
the device and therefore Connection Expert won’t be able to display it. If this
occurs, you’ll typically be presented with the Windows New Hard ware Found
Wizard, which will give you the opportunity to assist Windows in finding a
driver. If a driver is found, you should restart the PC and verify that Windows
identifies the device (which will be evident by the lack of the New Hardware
Found Wizard for that device).
2 The other situation where Connection Expert won’t display a PCIe device is in
the event that, when Connection Expert is started, Windows has not yet
completed assigning drivers to the devices (the chassis or modules in the
chassis) found during enumeration. This is similar to the case
above—Connection Expert will not display modules that it cannot identify. In
this situation, however, the driver exists but it has not yet been assigned to
the device by the time Connection Expert is started.
This situation should be very rare; if it occurs, it would be expected to occur
with slower PCs. The solution for this situation depends on which version of IO
Libraries Suite you have installed and is described below.
The next two sections describe the PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries
Suite versions 16.0 and 16.1 (and later).
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
23
Chassis and Host Controller Power Up/Down Sequence
PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite
PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite 16.0
In addition to following the power sequence described earlier, the PC must be
restarted in certain situations to ensure that the chassis and its modules are
recognized by Connection Expert 16.0, which is part of Keysight IO Libraries
Suite 16.0. The PC must be restarted as shown in Figure 7.
Boot
#1
Chassis power
(High = powered up)
Remote Controller PC
(High = turned on)
Remote Controller PC
Startup Event(s)
Boot
#2
If the chassis configuration has changed
since the last boot (or if this is the firstever boot), sufficient time needs to be
allowed between when Windows is up and
when the PC is restarted to ensure that
Windows is able to assign drivers to the
new modules that it finds. This is usually
completed within one minute, but can take
longer depending on the number of new
modules, the speed of your computer, and
other
th software
ft
bbeing
i executed
t d as the
th
computer boots up.
Presuming that the configuration hasn’t
changed since the restart, Connection Expert can be started
R
t t
Restart
immediately after Windows is up (the
the PC
Connection second time) because Windows has kept a
Expert 16.0 can be
copy of the drivers assigned following the
Windows is up as indicated started immediately first boot, and uses this information to
after Windows is up.
up quickly
b the
th presence off the
th
by
i kl assign
i ddrivers
i
ffollowing
ll i the
h secondd
Windows splash screen.
boot.
Figure 7 Restarting of the Remote Controller PC after Windows starts for
Keysight IO Libraries Suite 16.0
The PC restart is required to ensure that Connection Expert 16.0 has a correct
view of the chassis configuration if the configuration has been changed. As noted
in Figure 7, the Restart needs to be sufficiently delayed after Windows starts to
allow Windows to assign drivers to any new modules detected during
enumeration by the BIOS. The remote controller PC also needs to be restarted if
this is the first-ever connection of the chassis to the PC.
While Figure 7 depicts a system with a remote controller PC, the same
requirement applies to a chassis containing an embedded controller. After
powering up the chassis (which powers up the embedded controller), the
embedded controller should be restarted if the conditions listed in Figure 7
apply.
24
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite
Chassis and Host Controller Power Up/Down Sequence
Although it is not advised that the chassis be powered up and down while the PC
is turned on, Figure 8 shows what is required in the situation where the chassis
configuration is changed while the PC is turned on—the PC must be restarted
twice after the chassis is powered up. As noted in Figure 8, the second restart
needs to be sufficiently delayed after Windows starts the first time to allow
Windows to assign drivers to the new modules detected during enumeration by
the BIOS. This will ensure that the chassis and its modules are recognized by
Connection Expert 16.0 when it is brought up after the second restart.
Modules changed
Boot
#1
Boot
#2
Chassis power
(High = powered on)
Remote Controller PC
(High = turned on)
Remote Controller PC
Startup Event(s)
Keysight Connection
Expert 16.0 can be
started immediately
after Windows is
Windows is upp as indicated up.
by the presence of the
Windows splash screen.
Restart
the PC
Restart
the PC
Because the chassis configuration has
changed since the last boot, sufficient
time needs to be allowed between when
Windows is up and when the PC is
restarted to ensure that Windows is able
to assign drivers to the new modules that
p
within
it finds. This is usuallyy completed
one minute, but can take longer depending
on the number of new modules, the speed
of your computer, and other software
being executed as the computer boots up.
After the second restart (and on
subsequent boots) and presuming that the
configuration hasn’t changed since the
first boot, Keysight Connection Expert 16.0
can be started immediately after Windows
is up because Windows has kept a copy of
the drivers assigned following the first
boot, and uses this information to quickly
assign drivers following subsequent boots.
Figure 8 Restarting the PC twice is required with IO Libraries Suite 16.0 if the
chassis is re-configured while the PC is on.
There are other situations where the sequence of two consecutive reboots should
be performed, including:
- If Connection Expert 16.0 fails to detect the presence of the chassis
- If Windows detects the presence of a new module but it isn’t displayed by
Connection Expert. This will cover the second of the two cases described on
page 23.
- Whenever you detect or suspect that the host controller PC has an incorrect
view of how the chassis is configured.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
25
Chassis and Host Controller Power Up/Down Sequence
PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite
PC startup events for Keysight IO Libraries Suite 16.1 or later
With IO Libraries Suite 16.1 or later, the need for the restart following boot #1 in
Figure 7 on page 24, and the need for the double restart shown in Figure 8 have
been reduced. For the first-ever connection of the chassis to the PC, or after
changing the chassis configuration, only a single boot of the PC is needed.
However, sufficient time needs to be allowed between when Windows is up and
when Keysight Connection 16.1 is started, as shown in Figure 9 and Figure 10.
Boot
#1
If the chassis configuration has changed since the last
boot, sufficient time needs to be allowed between
when Windows is up and when t Connection
Expert 16.1 is started to ensure that Windows is able to
assign drivers to the new modules that it finds
finds. This is
usually completed within one minute, but can take
longer depending on the number of new modules, the
speed of your computer, and other software being
executed as the computer boots up.
Chassis power
(High = powered up)
Remote Controller PC
(High = turned on)
Remote Controller PC
Startup Event(s)
Starting of Connection Expert 16.1
On subsequent boots and presuming that the
configuration hasn’t changed since the first boot,
onnection Expert can be started immediately
after Windows is up because Windows has kept a copy
off the
assigned
andd uses
h ddrivers
i
i d following
f ll i the
h first
fi boot,
b
this information to quickly assign drivers following
subsequent boots.
Windows is up as indicated
by the presence of the
Windows
splash
Wi d
l h screen.
Figure 9
Modules changed
A single boot is required with Connection Expert 16.1.
Boot
#1
Because the chassis configuration has changed
since the last boot, sufficient time needs to be
allowed between when Windows is up and when
Keysight Connection Expert 16.1 is started to ensure
that Windows is able to assign drivers to the new
modules that it finds. This is usually completed
within one minute, but can take longer depending
on the number of new modules, the speed of your
computer, and other software being executed as
the computer boots up
up.
Chassis power
(High = powered on)
Remote Controller PC
(High = turned on)
Remote Controller PC
Startup Event(s)
Restart
the PC
Starting
St
ti off Keysight
Connection Expert 16.1
Windows is up as indicated
p
byy the presence
of the
Windows splash screen.
On subsequent boots and presuming that the
configuration hasn’t changed since the first boot,
Keysight Connection Expert can be started
immediately after Windows is up because
Windows has kept a copy of the drivers assigned
following the first boot, and uses this information
to quickly assign drivers following subsequent
boots.
Figure 10 A single restart is required after chassis modules are changed with
Connection Expert 16.1.
26
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Performing a system restart
Chassis and Host Controller Power Up/Down Sequence
The two cases described on page 23 where Connection Expert doesn’t display
the chassis or a module in the chassis can occur with Connection Expert 16.1. If
the New Hard ware Found Wizard is displayed, follow the steps presented on
page 23 to associate a driver with the device. If Connection Expert 16.1 doesn’t
display a particular device, click the Refresh All button to see if Windows has now
assigned a driver to the device, which will allow Connection Expert 16.1 to
display the device.
In general, if it ever appears that your chassis configuration as displayed by
Connection Expert 16.1 differs from your actual configuration, click the Refresh All
button—this should align the displayed configuration to the actual configuration.
Even with IO Libraries 16.1 and later versions, it is always advisable to boot the
PC a second time to ensure that the PC properly enumerates the chassis.
Performing a system restart
For a system with a remote controller PC, system restart refers to the power
sequence shown in Figure 11. The remote controller PC is turned off followed by
the chassis being powered down for at least one second. The chassis is then
powered up followed by turning on the PC.
NOTE: When the chassis is powered down using the front panel ON/Standby pushbutton or the Inhibit
signal on the rear panel DB-9 connector, the chassis is still connected to AC power. Therefore, the 5Vaux
(auxiliary) supply is powered, and is supplying power to components such as the Monitor Processor. The
other chassis supplies (3
(3.3V,
3V 5V
5V, 12V
12V, and -12V)
12V) are not powered.
powered
Chassis power
(High = powered up)
Turn off the PC before powering
down the chassis.
Power up the chassis before turning on
the PC – the three second delay should
be observed prior to turning on the PC.
Remote Controller PC
(High = turned on)
Figure 11 Power sequence for a system restart
A system restart is used in situations such as restoring the 1x8 factory default
PCIe link configuration if the reconfiguration process is interrupted. The first part
of the restoration process is performing a system restart.
If the chassis contains an embedded controller, a system restart consists simply
of power cycling the chassis, which will also restart the embedded controller.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
27
Chassis and Host Controller Power Up/Down Sequence
Performing a chassis hard reset
Performing a chassis hard reset
A chassis hard reset refers to powering down the chassis and then disconnecting
it from AC power. A hard reset is required in response to certain self test failures
as described in Chapter 21, “Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results,”
starting on page 129. As noted in Figure 11 on page 27, when the chassis is
connected to AC power, the 5Vaux supply is powered, and is supplying power to
certain chassis components, such as the Monitor Processor. Performing a hard
reset ensures that power is removed from all chassis components.
To perform a chassis hard reset, the chassis should be removed from AC power
for a minimum of 30 seconds—this is to ensure that the 5Vaux supply is
completely powered down. The entire sequence is shown in Figure 12.
To perform a hard reset, remove AC
power from the chassis for a minimum
of 30 seconds.
Chassis power
(High = powered up)
Turn off the PC before powering
down the chassis.
Power up the chassis before
turning on the PC – the three
second delay should be observed
prior to turning on the PC.
Remote Controller PC
(High = turned on)
Figure 12 Power sequence for a chassis hard reset
In essence, a chassis hard reset is a system restart that includes unplugging the
chassis from AC power after the chassis is powered down.
28
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
5
Overview of Chassis Management
Capabilities
The M9018A chassis provides extensive management capabilities to allow you to
monitor and control many aspects of the chassis operation. For example, you can
monitor the temperatures reported by the eight backplane temperature sensors
using the soft front panel (SFP). Furthermore, you can use the SFP to set a
maximum temperature alarm threshold such that an alarm will be generated if
the temperature of any temperature sensor exceeds the threshold.
In addition to using the SFP to monitor and control the chassis, you can develop
programs to monitor and control the chassis. Keysight provides IVI
(Interchangeable Virtual Instrument, see www.ivifoundation.org) drivers for the
chassis. To support the most popular programming languages and development
environments, Keysight offers both the IVI-C and IVI-COM drivers—please see
the IVI Foundation website for a description of these drivers. In addition, Keysight
provides a LabVIEW driver for the chassis.
Keysight recommends that you use the SFP to learn the chassis management
capabilities. Because the programmatic capabilities largely parallel the
capabilities provided by the SFP, learning the SFP first will provide the basis for
learning how the IVI-COM and IVI-C drivers interface to the chassis. In support of
this approach, each chassis management capability is first described by a
diagram showing how that chassis management capability is accessed using the
SFP. Subsequently, the same diagram is used twice, first with an IVI-COM
overlay showing the IVI-COM C# methods and properties, and secondly with an
IVI-C overlay showing the IVI-C C++ functions and attributes.
29
Overview of Chassis Management Capabilities
Summary of chassis management capabilities
Summary of chassis management capabilities
The chassis provides the following management capabilities:
– Viewing the chassis hardware and software revision information
– Monitoring the speed of the three fans. This monitoring capability includes the
ability to set a fan speed threshold such that, if any fan speed falls below the
threshold, an alarm is generated.
– Monitoring the temperatures of the eight chassis temperature sensors. This
monitoring capability includes the ability to set a temperature threshold such
that, if the temperature reported by any sensor rises above the threshold, an
alarm is generated.
– Setting of the fan speed vs. chassis temperature profile
– Monitoring of the four main power supply rails: 3.3 VDC, 5 VDC, 12 VDC and
-12 VDC. This monitoring capability includes the ability to set upper and lower
voltage limits around each voltage rail such that, if a voltage rail falls outside
of its limits, an alarm is generated.
- Monitoring the 10 MHz reference clock source
- Monitoring and selecting the PCIe link configuration
– Configuring and monitoring the parallel trigger bus signals PXI_TRIG[0:7]
- Executing a chassis self test
Enabling use of the SFP to configure chassis parameters
In order to use the SFP to configure the chassis, the SFP Allow Control check box
shown in Figure 13 must be checked. This check box, which is available on all
three tabs of the SFP, is provided to prevent unintentionally changing a chassis
parameter.
Figure 13 SFP Allow Control check box
30
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
The chassis alarm architecture
Overview of Chassis Management Capabilities
The chassis alarm architecture
The chassis provides seven alarms to assist you in monitoring the chassis. For
example, you can set a temperature alarm threshold such that, if a chassis
temperature sensor reports a temperature above the threshold, an alarm is
generated. Alarms can be set and monitored using the SFP and
programmatically.
Chapter 7 describes the chassis alarm architecture, including the functionality
that is provided in hardware and the functionality that is provided in software.
The chapter also describes how alarms operate if multiple processes are using
the same alarm.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
31
Overview of Chassis Management Capabilities
32
The chassis alarm architecture
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
6
Viewing the Chassis Revision and
Updating Firmware
This chapter describes how to use the M9018A SFP and IVI drivers to view the
chassis revision information. Included in this information is the revision number of
the chassis firmware. The chassis firmware is shown within the Chassis Manager
block diagram (see “M9018A Block Diagram” on page 4, and controls much of
chassis operation. The chapter also describes how to determine if there is a later
revision of the chassis firmware available from Keysight.
Viewing the chassis revision information using the SFP
Bring up the SFP About dialog from the SFP menu bar by clicking Help > About.
This will display the dialog in Figure 14.
Figure 14 SFP Help > About dialog
33
Viewing the Chassis Revision and Updating Firmware
Viewing the chassis revision information using the IVI drivers
The Hard ware Revision contains four numbers representing four chassis
components—the chassis firmware revision is the first number listed. Of the four
components whose revision numbers are being reported, only the chassis
firmware is customer upgradeable. Information on upgrading chassis firmware is
provided below.
Viewing the chassis revision information using the IVI drivers
The chassis revision string can be viewed using the IVI-COM and IVI-C drivers as
follows:
IVI-COM: Use the InstrumentFirmwareRevision property.
IVI-C: Use the AGM9018_ATTR_INSTRUMENT_FIRMWARE_REVISION
attribute
Chassis firmware revision checking and installation
To determine if there is a later revision of chassis firmware available, perform the
following steps:
1 Go to www.keysight.com/find/M9018A and click the Technical Support tab.
2 Under Technical Support, click the Drivers & Software tab. If there are chassis
firmware updates available, they will be listed under this tab, and can be
viewed by clicking Firmware Update under Refine the List.
3 Compare your chassis firmware revision number to the list of chassis firmware
revision numbers that are available. If there are later revisions available,
Keysight recommends installing the latest version.
To install the latest chassis firmware, perform these steps:
1 Click the link to the latest (or desired) firmware update and follow the
instructions provided to download and install the firmware on your chassis.
2 Power cycle the chassis after the firmware installation is complete, and verify
that your host controller PC can communicate to the chassis.
34
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
7
The Chassis Alarm Architecture
The chassis provides seven alarms to assist you in monitoring the chassis. For
example, you can set a temperature alarm threshold such that, if a chassis
temperature sensor reports a temperature above the threshold, an alarm will be
generated. Alarms can be set and monitored programmatically and using the
SFP.
Figure 15 on page 36 describes the chassis alarm architecture, including
identifying the functionality that is provided in hardware and the functionality
that is provided in software. The figure also describes how alarms operate if
multiple processes are using the same alarm.
Following Figure 15, the information provided by the front panel Power, Fan, and
Temperature LEDs is described.
35
Chassis Alarm Architecture
Interactions between programs using the chassis alarms
Alarm operation
The chassis has these seven alarms:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
It is important to understand how your IVI-C
COM or IVI-C
C program interacts with the SFP alarms -- or, for that matter, with any program(s) that
use the alarms. Programs that are operating simultaneously will need to share certain alarm resources. Each of the seven alarms has one
instance of the tan-colored Set/Reset Latch and each alarm has the OR gate feeding into the latch – these tan elements represent hardware in
the chassis. For discussion purposes, the Fan Speed Alarm Set/Reset Latch will be used as an example. The chassis contains one Fan Speed
Alarm Set/Reset Latch , w hich all processes share .
Fan speed alarm
Temperature alarm
3.3V alarm
5V alarm
12V alarm
-12V alarm
10 MHz reference clock changed alarm
The elements which provide inputs to the tan-colored hardware elements are also singular and shared. For example, there is only one
Minimum Fan Speed Alarm Threshold. If the threshold is set using the SFP and is then set to a different value using the IVI-COM driver, the
last-set threshold will be in effect.
Each alarm has an Alarm Set/Reset Latch (“latch”) – please see the figure below for an example of one latch . Each of
the seven latches is set if the associated alarm limit/threshold is exceeded. “Exceeded”, in this context, means that
the associated alarm threshold has been surpassed. In the case of the fan speed alarm, this means that at least one
fan speed is lower than the Minimum Fan Speed Alarm Threshold. Similarly, a power supply rail th at h as exceed ed its
limits means that its voltage is outside of the range defined by the upper and lower voltage limits.
NOTE: To keep the SFP in sync with any changes that have been made programmatically to their shared resources, the SFP will poll the
relevant chassis parameters every second and update its display accordingly. For example, if your program changes the Minimum Fan
Speed Alarm Threshold, the new value will be reflected on the SFP Configure Alarms tab (if the SFP is running, of course) within one
second. If your application program is running in an environment where the SFP is also running and if chassis parameters are being
changed using the SFP, your program can likewise poll the relevant parameters in order to detect if they’ve been changed by the SFP
user.
Continuing with the fan alarm example, the two fan alarm resources that are not shared are Alarm Enabled and Alarm Occurred. Each process,
including the SFP, will have its own software version of these two properties as shown in the figure below. This allows a process that is
interested in the fan alarm to enable its version of fan alarm while another, disinterested process can disable its version of fan alarm. In the
example below, there are three Alarm Occurred properties, one for the SFP and two representing user applications. While they share the
output of the Set/Reset Latch, they each have their own Alarm Enabled signal and their own Alarm Occurred signal.
Setting of the latches allows alarm conditions to be detected/captured in the absence of an operator. The latch
OUTPUT does not have a default value—if the SET input is true (for example, at power-on due to a fan speed being
below the default Minimum Fan Speed Threshold of 00 RPM), the fan alarm latch OUTPUT will be set True at poweron.
Each latch can be reset (cleared) using its associated Clear Alarm button on the SFP. Reset on the SFP Utility
dropdown menu will reset all seven latches. However, if any alarm threshold is still exceeded when the latch is reset,
the latch will be immediately set true again.
IMPORTANT: Even though the Alarm Enabled and Alarm Occurred properties are separate for each process, all processes share the same
latch as shown below. This can lead to the situation where one process detects that its version of Alarm Occurred is true and
then resets the shared latch (using the Clear Alarm call) before a second, also-interested process has read its version of Alarm
Occurred. This can result in the second process missing its version of Alarm Occurred. As recommended in the section M9018A
Software Architecture, application developers should establish policies for accessing shared resources to avoid this situation.
If the latch output is True and if the SFP Alarm Enabled is true, Alarm Occurred will be lit on the SFP. Alarm Occurred
is set false if Alarm Enabled is set false. However, setting Alarm Enabled false does not reset the latch—this can only
be done using Clear Alarm or Reset. Likewise, changing the corresponding alarm threshold to a value such that the
l
lilimit
i iis no llonger being
b i exceeded
d d does
d
h llatch.
h
alarm
not reset the
Example of one alarm latch
latch SET input example
Application #1
Al
Alarm
Enabled
E bl d
AND
Application
pp
#1
Alarm Occurred
Application #2
Alarm Enabled
AND
Application #2
Alarm Occurred
threshold
parameter value
A Clear Alarm IVI-COM or IVI-C call can be made
from the application program to reset the latch. The
SFP, in fact, implements
p
its Clear Alarm button byy
making an IVI-COM Clear Alarm call.
The SET input will be True
when the associated alarm
limit/threshold is exceeded
exceeded.
Alarm Set/Reset
Latch
SET
Clear Alarm
Each of the seven alarms has a Clear
Alarm button and an Alarm Enabled
checkbox on the SFP. The Fan Alarm
Enabled check box is shown here.
The Alarm Occurred signals need to be polled in
software in order to detect their presence. The IVICOM and IVI-C drivers do not support an interrupt
or event mechanism that can be used by software
to detect the occurrence of an alarm.
alarm
OUT
AND
SFP Alarm Occurred
RESET
OR
The SFP Reset will reset
all seven alarm latches.
latches
3745
F Alarm
Fan
Al
Enabled
E bl d
Figure 15 Chassis Alarm Architecture
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
36
Relationship between Alarm Occurred and the front panel LEDs
Relationship between Alarm Occurred and the front panel LEDs
The fans, temperature sensors, and voltage rails have front panel LEDs
associated with them. This section describes the relationship between each LED
and its associated Alarm Occurred indicator.
Figure 16 shows one example of an alarm latch and an LED.
Front panel LED
(1 of 3)
LED drive logic
This signal will be True if the chassis
parameter being monitored exceeds
its threshold.
Threshold Exceeded
Chassis pparameter;;
for example,
chassis temperature
a Set/Reset
Set/ eset
Alarm
Latch
SET
OUT
AND
Alarm threshold
RESET
Alarm Enabled
SFP Alarm Occurred
Figure 16 Alarm latch and front panel LED drive logic
In this example, the Threshold Exceeded signal will be True if the chassis parameter
being monitored exceeds its threshold—for example, if a temperature sensor
reports a temperature greater than the temperature threshold. A True value of
Threshold Exceeded will cause the following:
1 The LED drive logic will flash the front panel LED, indicating that the
parameter being monitored has exceeded its threshold.
2 The Alarm Set/Reset Latch will be set. If, in addition, Alarm Enabled is True,
the SFP Alarm Occurred indicator will be illuminated.
If the parameter being monitored then returns to below its threshold (for
example, the room temperature is lowered, causing the chassis temperature
sensors to report lower temperatures), Threshold Exceeded will go False. This will
cause the LED to cease flashing. However, the alarm latch will remain latched.
This can lead to the situation where Alarm Occurred (based on the latched
signal) will be indicating an alarm condition, while the associated LED is not
likewise indicating an alarm condition.
This situation simply means that the condition that caused the alarm is no longer
present. While the alarm can be easily cleared by pressing the SFP Clear button,
it is suggested that the cause of the alarm be explored. Although it can be
difficult to determine the cause of a prior alarm, the SFP will often provide
information regarding what might have caused the alarm. For example, the
temperature threshold may be set too close to the temperature being reported by
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
37
Power-on default alarm thresholds
one of the chassis temperature sensors, which could cause intermittent setting
of the temperature alarm latch. Possible next steps include determining if a
module is running excessively hot, or adjusting the temperature threshold higher
to provide additional margin.
Note that, while the front panel Temperature LED is off when temperatures are
normal, the Fan and Power LEDs are on when their associated parameters are
normal. In all cases, a flashing LED indicates that the associated parameter has
exceeded its alarm threshold.
Power-on default alarm thresholds
This section summarizes the power-on default values of the chassis alarm
thresholds as well as the valid range over which the alarm thresholds can be set.
The phrase power-on default means that, regardless of how the thresholds are
changed while power is applied, the thresholds return to factory-defined default
values whenever the chassis is power cycled.
For example, if you use the SFP to set the Minimum Fan Speed Alarm Threshold
to 500 RPM, this setting will not persist through a power cycle; the Minimum Fan
Speed Alarm Threshold will be restored to the power-on default value of 1200
RPM when the chassis is power cycled.
Table 2
Both the SFP and the IVI drivers will error check the alarm values to ensure they
are within the valid range. The SFP will prevent setting of alarm values outside
the valid range while the IVI drivers will return an error for values outside the
valid range.
Chassis power-on default thresholds
Threshold
Defaul t
Threshold
Settable Range
Minimum Fan Speed Alarm Threshold
1200 RPM
1 to 10,000 RPM
Maximum Temperature Alarm Threshold
65 °C
1 to 65 °C
3.3V Rail
5V Rail
12V Rail
–12V Rail
*
Upper Voltage Limit
3.465V
(3.3V + 5%)
nominal value +.01% up to nominal value + 20%
Lower Voltage Limit
3.135V*
(3.3V - 5%)
nominal value -.01% down to nominal value -20%
Upper Voltage Limit
5.25V
nominal value +.01% up to nominal value + 20%
Lower Voltage Limit
4.75V
nominal value -.01% down to nominal value - 20%
Upper Voltage Limit
12.6V
nominal value +.01% up to nominal value +20%
Lower Voltage Limit
11.4V
nominal value -.01% down to nominal value -20%
Upper Voltage Limit
-11.4V
nominal value +.01% up to nominal value + 20%
Lower Voltage Limit
-12.6V
nominal value -.01% down to nominal value -20%
* Note that the 3.3V rail initially has voltage limits of ±5% around the nominal value. However, as noted in Chapter 2, the IVI driver will
expand the 3.3V limits to ±10%. Because the M9018A chassis SFP uses the IVI-COM driver, the SFP also expands the 3.3V limits to ±10%
38
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Power-on default alarm thresholds
Events which re-establish the power-on default thresholds
Power cycling is just one event that causes the chassis power-on default alarm
thresholds to be re-established by the chassis. The complete list is:
- Power cycling, as mentioned
- Asserting a chassis reset using the SFP Utility > Reset menu
- Asserting a programmatic chassis reset using the IVI-COM, IVI-C or LabVIEW
drivers.
The SFP alarm thresholds
In Simulation Mode, the SFP default alarm thresholds are identical to the chassis
alarm thresholds shown in Table 2 on page 38. However, in SImulation Mode, the
alarms are not active. In Hardware Mode, however, the SFP reads and displays
the chassis thresholds. In other words, the SFP does not provide its own default
thresholds in Hardware Mode.
For example, assume that the SFP has been used to change the Minimum Fan
Speed Threshold from 1200 RPM to 500 RPM followed by closing the SFP. When
the SFP is started next, it will read the value of Minimum Fan Speed Threshold
from the chassis (500 RPM, in this example), and display this value on the SFP as
the Minimum Fan Speed Alarm Threshold.
Power cycling the chassis will re-establish all default values. Continuing with the
previous example, the chassis Minimum Fan Speed Alarm Threshold will be set
back to its power-on default value of 1200 RPM by the power cycle. When the
SFP next connects to the chassis, it will read this value from the chassis and
display 1200 RPM as the Minimum Fan Speed Alarm Threshold.
In the description of each SFP alarm capability, the SFP alarm diagrams will
show the chassis default alarm thresholds as presented in Table 2 on page 38.
This is because, as described above, the SFP reads and displays the chassis
alarm thresholds. As long as the particular chassis alarm hasn’t been changed
earlier (for example, during a prior SFP session), the chassis power-on default
alarm threshold will still be in effect—and will be read and displayed by the SFP.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
39
Power-on default alarm thresholds
40
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
8
Monitoring Fan Speeds
The M9018A chassis contains three fans that are mounted on the chassis rear
panel and provide cooling for the chassis. The chassis allows you to monitor the
speed of each fan in revolutions per minute (RPM). You can also set a minimum
fan speed threshold such that, if any fan speed falls below this threshold, a fan
speed alarm is generated
These monitoring capabilities are available using the SFP and programmatically
using the chassis drivers. In addition, the front panel Fan LED provides
information on fan speeds. Use of the SFP, the front panel Fan LED, and the IVI
drivers to monitor the chassis temperature sensors are described in the following
three diagrams:
- SFP and the front panel Fan LED — Figure 17 on page 42
- IVI-COM driver and C# — Figure 18 on page 43
- IVI-C driver and C++ — Figure 19 on page 44
Early M9018A chassis had a minimum fan speed of 800 RPM.
Chassis with Monitor Processor Software revision number 0.59, 5
and greater have a default minimum fan speed of 1200 RPM. To
identify the Monitor Processor softwware revision number, refer to
Chapter 6, “Viewing the Chassis Revision and Updating Firmware”
on page 33.
41
Fan Speed Monitoring using the SFP
and the Front Panel Fan LED
4HEMonitorTABALLOWSTHETHREEFAN
SPEEDSTOBEMONITORED4HISTABALSO
PROVIDESTHEFANSPEED!LARM/CCURRED
INDICATORANDTHE#LEAR!LARMBUTTON
WHICHAREDESCRIBEDBELOW
COMPARATOR
&!.
&!.
&!.
#OMPAREFAN
SPEEDSTOTHE
-INIMUM&AN
3PEED!LARM
4HRESHOLD
-INIMUM&AN
!LARM3PEED
4HRESHOLD
Front panel Fan LED On: !LLFANSPEEDSARE-INIMUM&AN3PEED
Flashing: /NEORMOREFANSSPEEDSARE-INIMUM&AN3PEED
,%$DRIVELOGIC
3PEEDOF
ANYFAN
Output
&AN3PEED!LARM
3ET2ESET,ATCH
4RUEIFANYFANSPEEDIS
BELOWTHE-INIMUM&AN
3PEED!LARM4HRESHOLD
3%4 /54
#LEAR!LARM
-INIMUM&AN
3PEED!LARM
4HRESHOLD
$EFAULTVALUE20-
20-OF
SLOWESTFAN
!LARM%NABLED
$EFAULTVALUE4RUECHECKED
4HEConfigure Alarms TABISUSEDTOSETTHE-INIMUM&AN3PEEDTHRESHOLDAND
ENABLEDISABLETHE&AN3PEED!LARM4HE-INIMUM&AN3PEEDCANBESETFROMTO
20-EITHERBYENTERINGTHEVALUEDIRECTLYORBYUSINGTHEUPDOWNARROWBUTTONS
!SANAIDINSETTINGTHE-INIMUM&AN3PEEDTHECURRENTVALUEOFTHESLOWESTFANIS
DISPLAYED
&AN3PEED!LARM
2%3%4
/2
3ELECTSLOWEST
FANSPEED
!.$
4HE&AN3PEED!LARM3ET2ESET,ATCHhLATCHvISSETIFANYFANSPEEDDROPSBELOWTHEUSER
SETTABLE-INIMUM&AN3PEED!LARM4HRESHOLDh-INIMUM&AN3PEEDv3ETTINGTHELATCHALLOWS
FANSPEEDISSUESTOBEDETECTEDCAPTUREDINTHEABSENCEOFANOPERATOR4HELATCHDOESNOT
HAVEADEFAULTSTATEˆIFTHE3%4INPUTISTRUEFOREXAMPLEATPOWERONDUETOAFANSPEEDBELOW
THEDEFAULT-INIMUM&AN3PEEDTHRESHOLD20-THELATCHWILLBESET4RUEATPOWERON
4HELATCHCANBERESETCLEAREDUSINGTHE#LEAR!LARMBUTTON2ESETONTHE3&05TILITY
DROPDOWNMENUORPROGRAMMATICALLY(OWEVERIFANYFANSPEEDISSTILLBELOWTHE-INIMUM&AN
3PEEDWHENTHELATCHISRESETTHELATCHWILLBEIMMEDIATELYSETTRUEAGAIN
)FTHELATCHOUTPUTIS4RUEANDIF!LARM%NABLEDISTRUE!LARM/CCURREDWILLBELIT!LARM
/CCURREDISHELDFALSEIF!LARM%NABLEDISSETFALSE(OWEVERSETTING!LARM%NABLEDFALSEDOES
NOTRESETTHELATCHˆTHISCANONLYBEDONEUSING#LEAR!LARMOR2ESET,IKEWISECHANGINGTHE
-INIMUM&AN3PEEDTOAVALUELOWERTHANTHETHREEFANSARECURRENTLYOPERATINGRESETSTHE
LATCH
!SDESCRIBEDINTHE-5SER'UIDESECTIONRelationship between Alarm Occurred and
the front panel LEDsITISPOSSIBLEFOR!LARM/CCURREDTOINDICATEALOWFANSPEEDWHILETHE
FRONTPANEL&AN,%$INDICATESTHATFANSPEEDSARENORMAL4HISSITUATIONCANOCCURIFAFAN
SPEEDISMOMENTARILYBELOWTHE-INIMUM&AN3PEEDWHICHSETSTHELATCHFOLLOWEDBYTHEFAN
SPEEDINCREASINGABOVETHE-INIMUM&AN3PEEDWHICHRESTORESTHE&AN,%$TOBEINGON
CONTINUOUSLYNORMAL
Figure 17 Fan speed monitoring using the SFP and the front panel Fan LED
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
42
Fan Speed Monitoring using the SFP
Fan Speedand
Monitoring
IVI-COM
the Frontusing
Panelthe
Fan
LED Driver and C#
driver.Fans.Name()
#/6>:$*
:
#/6C#C
:D.8
(
driver.Fans.get_Item("FAN2").RPM
)>/:
C#C6.8
Monitor driver.Fans.Count
.
?;$@
B*
COMPARATOR
#$
!
#
#*
!
Front panel Fan LED
driver.Fans.Alarm.Occurred
Output
!
! !-.%
)
!
!!
driver.Fans.Alarm.Clear()
!
!& +
.
!
!
.8
driver.Utility.Reset()
.7
driver.Fans.Alarm.Enabled
'
B$;;.8
&
'
B/>6
driver.Fans.Alarm.Configure()
Config
gure Alarms !
-
!
!$
$;;;;.8)(
))(-
(
)
(
(!
(!
)
)
/.86&
)
#'
.&!&
Clears the Fan Alarm Latch.
driver.Fans.Alarm.MinRPM
On: !
Flashing: "!
%&'
(
!
)
+
.
=
!
7
)
!
(
))
)!8
!
!-.%/3
56)
7
!
/
!
! /3
!566!(
!( -
9!&:
7
!
/$;;.86
7
/
6 ( . !8 +
)
/
6(
.!8+
)
(
)<)
!
)(
= &
=
&
&
<(
&
9
)(
.%>((
!
)(
?;$@+ARelationship between Alarm Occurred and
the front panel LEDs
!8
(
=E=7
%&'
:!8
)
!/
6
)
(!%&'(
)/
6
=)(!8=)(!8
/)(6(
))
8
(C
C?;$@+A
C(
C
Figure 18 Fan speed monitoring using the IVI-COM driver and C++
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
43
Fan Speed
Monitoring
using
the SFP
Fan Speed
Monitoring
using
the IVI-C
Driver and C++
and the Front Panel Fan LED
AgM9018_GetFanName()
>:$*
:
:C#C
:D
.8(
AGM9018_ATTR_FAN_RPM
>
.8
Monitor AGM9018_ATTR_FAN_COUNT
.
?;$@
B*
COMPARATOR
#$
!
#
#*
!
Front panel Fan LED
AGM9018_ATTR_FAN_ALARM_OCCURRED
Output
!
! !-.%
)
!
!!
AgM9018_FanAlarmClear()
AGM9018_ATTR_FAN_ALARM_MIN_RPM
!& +
.8
AgM9018_reset()
.7
(
(
AGM9018_ATTR_FAN_ALARM_ENABLED
'
B$;;.8
&
'
B/>6
Config
gure Alarms !
AgM9018_FanAlarmConfigure()
-
!
!$
$;;;;.8)(
))(-
(
)
((
(!
!
)
)
&
)
+
.
=
!
7
)
!
(
))
)!8
!
!-.%/3
56)
7
!
/
!
! /3
!566!(
!( -
9!&:
7
!
/$;;.86
7
/
6 ( . !8 +
)
/
6(
.!8+
)
(
)<)
!
)(
.
!
!
#'
.&!&
Clears the Fan Alarm Latch.
!
On: !
Flashing: "!
%&'
(
!
)
= &
=
&
&
<(
&
9
)(
.%>((
!
)(
?;$@+ARelationship between Alarm Occurred and
the front panel LEDs
!8
(
=E=7
%&'
:!8
)
!/
6
)
(!%&'(
)/
6
=)(!8=)(!8
/)(6(
))
8
(C
C?;$@+A
C(
C
Figure 19 Fan speed monitoring using the IVI-C driver and C++
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
44
Monitoring the Chassis Temperature
9
Monitoring the Chassis
Temperature
The M9018A chassis allows you to monitor each of the eight temperature
sensors using either the SFP, the IVI drivers, or the LabVIEW driver. In addition,
the SFP and IVI drivers can be used to set an upper temperature threshold such
that an alarm will be generated if any temperature sensor reports a temperature
above the specified threshold. The front panel Temperature LED also provides
information about the chassis temperature.
The eight chassis temperature sensors are located on the chassis printed circuit
board that contains the module connectors as shown in Figure 20. This board is
known as the chassis backplane or just backplane.
Figure 20
Location of the eight temperature sensors on the backplane
By knowing the location of the temperature sensors relative to the chassis slots,
you can determine which modules are potentially contributing to excessive
temperatures. To address this, you can take steps such as redistributing modules
in the chassis or installing air inlet modules adjacent to high power modules to
provide additional ventilation.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
45
Monitoring the Chassis Temperature
Use of the SFP, the front panel Temperature LED, and the IVI drivers to monitor
the chassis temperature sensors is described in the following three diagrams:
- Temperature Monitoring using the SFP and the Front Panel Temperature LED
— Figure 21 on page 47
- IVI-COM driver and C# — Figure 22 on page 48
- IVI-C driver and C++ — Figure 23 on page 49
46
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Temperature Monitoring using the SFP
and the Front Panel Temperature LED
The Monitor tab allows the
temperatures reported by the eight
chassis temperature sensors to be
monitored. This tab also provides
the temperature Alarm Occurred
indicator and the Clear Alarm
button.
Front panel Temperature LED
On: The LED is illuminated for 3 seconds at power on to permit verification
that the LED and its drive circuitry are operational.
LED drive logic
Off: All temperature sensors are < Maximum Temperature Alarm Threshold
Flashing: One or more temperature sensors are > Maximum Temperature
Alarm Threshold
Max Temp
Threshold
Temperature Sensor 1
COMPARATOR
Temperature
of any sensor
Temperature Sensor 2
Temperature Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Temperature Sensor 3
Compare all 8
temperature
sensors to the
Max Temp
Threshold.
Temperature Sensor 4
Temperature Sensor 5
Output of
Comparator
SET OUT
Output
Temperature Sensor 6
True if any temperature
sensor is above the
Maximum Temperature
Alarm Threshold
Temperature Sensor 8
Maximum Temperature
Alarm Threshold
(1 ƒC to 70 ƒC )
Temperature Alarm
Occurred
RESET
Temperature Sensor 7
OR
Max Temp Threshold
AND
The Temperature Alarm Set/Reset Latch (“latch”) is set if any temperature goes above the
user-settable Maximum Temperature Alarm Threshold (“Max Temp Threshold”). Setting the
latch allows temperature issues to be detected/captured in the absence of an operator. The
latch does not have a default state—if the SET input is true, for example, at power-on due to a
temperature sensor reporting a temperature above the default Max Temp Threshold (70 ƒC),
the latch will be set True at power-on.
The latch can be reset (cleared) using the Clear Alarm button, Reset on the Utility dropdown
menu, or programmatically. However, if any temperature sensor is still reporting a temperature
above the Max Temp Threshold when the latch is reset, the latch will be immediately set True
again.
Select hottest temperature sensor
If the latch is set and if Alarm Enabled is True, Alarm Occurred will be True. Alarm Occurred is
held False if Alarm Enabled is set False; however, setting Alarm Enabled False does not reset
the latch. Changing the Max Temp Threshold to a temperature higher than all eight
temperature sensors are currently reporting resets the latch.
As described in the M9018 User Guide section Relationship between Alarm Occurred and
the front panel LEDs, it is possible for Alarm Occurred to indicate an over temperature
condition while the front panel LED indicates the temperatures are normal. This situation can
occur if a temperature sensor momentarily reports a temperature above Max Temp Threshold
(which sets the latch) followed by the chassis temperature dropping such that all sensors now
report temperatures below Max Temp Threshold – this will turn the LED off (normal operation).
Default value = 70 ƒC
Alarm Enabled
Default value = True (checked)
The Configure Alarms tab is used to set the Max Temp
Threshold and enable/disable the Temperature Alarm.
The Max Temp Threshold can be set from 1 to 70 ƒC
either by entering the value directly or by using the
up/down arrow buttons. To aid in setting the Max Temp
Threshold, the current value of the hottest temperature
sensor is displayed.
Figure 21 Temperature monitoring using the SFP and front panel LEDs
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
47
driver.TemperatureSensors.Name()
Name() takes a temperature sensor index of 1 to 8 and returns the
The Monitor tab
allows
the For example, the value returned for Name(5)
temperature
sensor
name.
temperatures
reported by the
eightname, not an index, is required to
is
"TS5". A temperature
sensor
chassis temperature sensors to be
obtain
a
sensor
temperature,
as shown below.
monitored.
i
d This
Thi tab
b also
l provides
id
Temperature
Monitoring
using
Temperature
Monitoring
using
thethe
SFP
and the Front
Panel
Temperature
IVI-COM
Driver
and C# LED
the temperature Alarm Occurred
driver.TemperatureSensors.get_Item().Temperature
indicator
and the Clear Alarm
button.
This property takes a temperature sensor name and
returns the temperature of that sensor.
Front panel Temperature LED
On: The LED is illuminated for 3 seconds at power on to permit verification
that the LED and its drive circuitry are operational
operational.
LED drive logic
Off: All temperature sensors are < Maximum Temperature Alarm Threshold
Flashing: One or more temperature sensors are > Maximum Temperature
Alarm Threshold
Max Temp
Threshold
Temperature Sensor 1
COMPARATOR
Temperature
of any sensor
Temperature Sensor 2
driver.TemperatureSensors.Count
Compare all 8
temperature
sensors to the
Max Temp
Threshold
Threshold.
Temperature Sensor 4
Returns the number of
temperature
sensors. For the
Temperature Sensor
5
M9018A chassis, Count = 8.
Output of
Comparator
True if any temperature
sensor is above the
Maximum Temperature
Alarm Threshold
p
Sensor 7
Temperature
Max Temp
p Threshold
Clears the
Temperature
Alarm Latch
OR
Sets the Maximum Temperature Alarm
Select hottest temperature sensor
Threshold from 1 °C to 70 °C
driver.TemperatureSensors.Alarm.MaxTemperature
AND
RESET
driver.TemperatureSensors.Alarm.Clear()
Temperature Sensor 8
Maximum Temperature
Alarm Threshold
(1 °C to 70 °C )
SET OUT
Output
Temperature Sensor 6
driver.TemperatureSensors.Alarm.Occurred
Temperature Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Temperature Sensor 3
Re-establishes all
default values.
driver.Utility.Reset()
driver.TemperatureSensors.Alarm.Enabled
Used to enable or disable the
temperature sensors alarm.
Returns the status of the temperature alarm. If True, this
indicates that the Max Temperature Threshold has been
Temperature Alarm
exceeded.
This is a per-application property and therefore the
Occurred
value reported programmatically may be different than the
temperature Alarm Occurred status reported by the SFP.
The Temperature Alarm Set/Reset Latch (“latch”) is set if any temperature goes above the
p
Alarm Threshold ((“Max Temp
p Threshold”).
) Setting
g the
user-settable Maximum Temperature
latch allows temperature issues to be detected/captured in the absence of an operator. The
latch does not have a default state—if the SET input is true, for example, at power-on due to a
temperature sensor reporting a temperature above the default Max Temp Threshold (70 °C),
the latch will be set True at power-on.
The latch can be reset (cleared) using the Clear Alarm button, Reset on the Utility dropdown
menu, or programmatically. However, if any temperature sensor is still reporting a temperature
above the Max Temp Threshold when the latch is reset, the latch will be immediately set True
again.
i
If the latch is set and if Alarm Enabled is True, Alarm Occurred will be True. Alarm Occurred is
held False if Alarm Enabled is set False; however, setting Alarm Enabled False does not reset
th latch.
the
l t h Changing
Ch
i th
the Max
M Temp
T
Threshold
Th h ld to
t a temperature
t
t
higher
hi h th
than allll eight
i ht
temperature sensors are currently reporting resets the latch.
As described in the M9018 User Guide section Relationship between Alarm Occurred and
the front
panelthe
LEDs
LEDs,
is possible for
Occurred to indicate
an over the
temperature
To show the parallels
between
SFP itcapabilities
andAlarm
the programmatic
capabilities,
IVI-COM driver
condition while the front panel LED indicates the temperatures are normal. This situation can
properties and methods
are
overlaid
next
to
their
SFP
counterparts.
occur if a temperature sensor momentarily reports a temperature above Max Temp Threshold
(which sets the latch) followed by the chassis temperature dropping such that all sensors now
Default value = 70 °C
Alarm Enabled
Default value = True (checked)
driver.TemperatureSensors.Alarm.Configure()
Configures the temperature alarm behavior by allowing setting of both
the Maximum Temperature Alarm Threshold (MaxTemperature) property
and the Enabled property.
The Configure Alarms tab is used to set the Max Temp
Threshold and enable/disable the Temperature Alarm.
The Max Temp Threshold can be set from 1 to 70 °C
either by entering the value directly or by using the
up/down arrow buttons. To aid in setting the Max Temp
Threshold, the current value of the hottest temperature
sensor is displayed.
Figure 22
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
It is important to understand
how your
program
interacts
with the
SFP.
yourthe
program
the SFP
(or, for
report temperatures
below
Max Temp
Threshold
– this
willIfturn
LED offand
(normal
operation)
operation).
that matter, any other program) are operating simultaneously, they will need to share certain chassis
resources. Please see the diagram "Chassis Alarm Architecture" in the M9018A User Guide chapter
"Overview of Chassis Management Capabilities" for a description of how the alarm resources are shared
between multiple processes.
Temperature monitoring using the IVI-COM driver and C#
48
AgM9018_GetTemperatureSensorName
Temperature
Monitoring
usingthe
theSFP
Temperature
Monitoring
using
and the Front
LED
IVI-CPanel
DriverTemperature
and C++
Name() takes a temperature sensor index of 1 to 8 and
returns
the temperature
The
Monitor
tab allows thesensor name. For example, the
temperatures
reported
by the is
eight
value returned
for Name(5)
"TS5". A temperature sensor
chassis
temperature
sensors
to
name, not an index, is requiredbeto obtain a sensor
monitored.
i
d Thi
This
b also
l provides
id
temperature,
astab
shown
below.
the temperature Alarm Occurred
indicator and the Clear Alarm
button.AGM9018_ATTR_TEMPERATURE
This attribute takes a temperature sensor name and returns
the temperature of that sensor with .1 °C resolution.
Front panel Temperature LED
On: The LED is illuminated for 3 seconds at power on to permit verification
that the LED and its drive circuitry are operational
operational.
LED drive logic
Off: All temperature sensors are < Maximum Temperature Alarm Threshold
Flashing: One or more temperature sensors are > Maximum Temperature
Alarm Threshold
Max Temp
Threshold
Temperature Sensor 1
COMPARATOR
Temperature
of any sensor
Temperature Sensor 2
AGM9018_ATTR_TEMPERATURESENSOR_COUNT
Temperature Sensor 4
Returns the number of
temperature
sensors. For the
Temperature Sensor
5
M9018A chassis, Count = 8.
Compare all 8
temperature
sensors to the
Max Temp
Threshold
Threshold.
Output of
Comparator
True if any temperature
sensor is above the
Maximum Temperature
Alarm Threshold
p
Sensor 7
Temperature
Max Temp
p Threshold
Clears the
Temperature
Alarm Latch
Sets the Maximum Temperature Alarm
Select hottest temperature sensor
Threshold from 1 °C to 70 °C
AGM9018_ATTR_TEMPERATURE_ALARM_MAX_TEMPERATURE
Alarm Enabled
Default value = True (checked)
AgM9018_TemperatureAlarmConfigure()
Configures the temperature alarm behavior by allowing setting of both
the Maximum Temperature Alarm Threshold (MaxTemperature) and the
Enabled property.
AND
The Temperature Alarm Set/Reset Latch (“latch”) is set if any temperature goes above the
p
Alarm Threshold ((“Max Temp
p Threshold”).
) Setting
g the
user-settable Maximum Temperature
latch allows temperature issues to be detected/captured in the absence of an operator. The
latch does not have a default state—if the SET input is true, for example, at power-on due to a
temperature sensor reporting a temperature above the default Max Temp Threshold (70 °C),
the latch will be set True at power-on.
OR
The latch can be reset (cleared) using the Clear Alarm button, Reset on the Utility dropdown
menu, or programmatically. However, if any temperature sensor is still reporting a temperature
above the Max Temp Threshold when the latch is reset, the latch will be immediately set True
again.
i
Re-establishes all
default values.
driver.Utility.Reset()
If the latch is set and if Alarm Enabled is True, Alarm Occurred will be True. Alarm Occurred is
held False if Alarm Enabled is set False; however, setting Alarm Enabled False does not reset
th latch.
the
l t h Changing
Ch
i th
the Max
M Temp
T
Threshold
Th h ld to
t a temperature
t
t
higher
hi h th
than allll eight
i ht
temperature sensors are currently reporting resets the latch.
AGM9018_ATTR_TEMPERATURE_ALARM_ENABLED
Default value = 70 °C
Returns the status of the temperature alarm. If True, this
indicates thatAlarm
the Maximum Temperature Threshold has been
Temperature
Occurred
exceeded.
This is a per-application property and therefore the
value reported programmatically may be different than the
temperature Alarm Occurred status reported by the SFP.
RESET
AgM9018_TemperatureAlarmClear()
Temperature Sensor 8
Maximum Temperature
Alarm Threshold
(1 °C to 70 °C )
SET OUT
Output
Temperature Sensor 6
AGM9018_ATTR_TEMPERATURE_ALARM_OCCURRED
Temperature Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Temperature Sensor 3
Used to enable or disable the
temperature sensors alarm.
As described in the M9018 User Guide section Relationship between Alarm Occurred and
the front panel LEDs
LEDs, it is possible for Alarm Occurred to indicate an over temperature
condition while the front panel LED indicates the temperatures are normal. This situation can
To showoccur
the parallels
between the SFP capabilities and the programmatic capabilities, the IVI-C
if a temperature sensor momentarily reports a temperature above Max Temp Threshold
driver attributes
and
functions
are overlaid
next to temperature
their SFP counterparts.
(which sets the latch) followed
by the chassis
dropping such that all sensors now
report temperatures below Max Temp Threshold – this will turn the LED off (normal operation)
operation).
The Configure Alarms tab is used to set the Max Temp
Threshold and enable/disable the Temperature Alarm.
The Max Temp Threshold can be set from 1 to 70 °C
either by entering the value directly or by using the
up/down arrow buttons. To aid in setting the Max Temp
Threshold, the current value of the hottest temperature
sensor is displayed.
It is important to understand how your program interacts with the SFP. If your program and the
SFP (or, for that matter, any other program) are operating simultaneously, they will need to share
certain chassis resources. Please see the diagram "Chassis Alarm Architecture" in the M9018A
User Guide chapter "Overview of Chassis Management Capabilities" for a description of how the
alarm resources are shared between multiple processes.
Figure 23 Temperature monitoring using the IVI-C driver and C++
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
49
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
10
Setting the Fan Speed vs. Chassis
Temperature Profile
The chassis allows you to control the fan speed vs. temperature profile. This is
done by specifying a chassis temperature at which the three fans will operate at
maximum speed. Maximum speed is achieved by the chassis supplying a drive
voltage to the fans with a 100% duty cycle.
For temperatures below the specified chassis temperature, the duty cycle of the
fan drive voltage will be less than 100%, which reduces the fan speed and the
fan noise. The reduction in fan speed is proportional to how far the chassis
temperature is below the specified chassis temperature. To ensure adequate
cooling at any temperature, the drive voltage to the fan will never drop below
40% duty cycle.
These fan speed vs. chassis temperature profile can be set using both the SFP
and programmatically, as described in the following three figures:
- Using the SFP — Figure 24 on page 51
- Using the IVI-COM driver and C# — Figure 25 on page 52
- Using IVI-C driver and C++ — Figure 26 on page 53
Early M9018A chassis had a minimum fan speed of 800 RPM.
Chassis with Monitor Processor Software revision number 0.59, 5
and greater have a default minimum fan speed of 1200 RPM. To
identify the Monitor Processor software revision number, refer to
Chapter 6, “Viewing the Chassis Revision and Updating Firmware”
on page 33.
50
Setting the Temperature at which the
Maximum Fan Speed is Achieved using the SFP
Lowest MaxRPMTemperature setting = 25 ƒC
MAX TEMPERATURE SELECTOR AND FAN DRIVER
Temperature Sensor 1
Generate fan voltage
duty cycle of 100% for
highest speed.
Temperature Sensor 2
FAN1
Temperature Sensor 3
Temperature Sensor 4
Temperature Sensor 5
Temperature Sensor 6
HIGH
Select
hottest
temperature
Generate fan voltage
duty cycle based on
the hottest chassis
temperature sensor
and the setting of the
temperature where
maximum fan speed
is achieved.
AUTO
fan
driver
Fan voltage duty cycle
25 ƒC: Temperature at which the maximum
fan RPM is achieved
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 ƒC: Temperature where the fan speeds begin ramping
up from 40% duty cycle for the 25 ƒC lowest
MaxRPMTemperature
0
FAN2
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Highest temperature (ƒC) reported by the
eight backplane temperature sensors
FAN3
FAN switch
(rear panel)
Default MaxRPMTemperature setting = 50 ƒC
Temperature Sensor 8
The Allow Control
check box must be
checked in order to
use the functionality
described on this
diagram.
This field displays the
position of the Fan Speed
Selector Switch. This
switch is on the rear panel
and is labeled FAN.
The Configure Fan Control dialog is used to set the parameter “Temperature (ƒC) where
maximum fan speed achieved” – this parameter will be referred to by its IVI–COM driver
name, MaxRPMTemperature. At SFP startup, the SFP reads the chassis value of
MaxRPMTemperature and inserts that value here. The chassis default value is 50 ƒC.
Fan voltage duty cycle
Temperature Sensor 7
50 ƒC: Temperature at which the
maximum fan RPM is achieved
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
25 ƒC
25 ƒC: Temperature where the fan speeds begin
ramping up from 40% duty cycle for the
50 ƒC default MaxRPMTemperature
0
Highest temperature (ƒC) reported by the
eight backplane temperature sensors
The M9018A chassis controls the speed of its three fans by varying the duty cycle of the drive voltage to the fans. When the rear panel FAN switch
(referred to as the “Fan Speed Selector Switch”) is set to HIGH, the fan voltage duty cycle is set to 100%, which generates the highest fan speeds and
the best chassis cooling – however, this also generates the most fan noise.
Regardless of the MaxRPMTemperature that is set, the fan speeds begin ramping up at 25 ƒC below MaxRPMTemperature. For example, if
MaxRPMTemperature is set to 65 ƒC (bottom curve), the fan speed begins ramping up at 25 ƒC below this temperature, or at 40 ƒC. At 65 ƒC, the fan
voltage duty cycle will be 100% (maximum fan speed).
Highest MaxRPMTemperature setting = 65 ƒC
65 ƒC: Temperature at which the
maximum fan RPM is achieved
Fan voltage duty cycle
When the Fan Speed Selector Switch is set to AUTO, the speed of the three fans is controlled based on the temperature of the chassis and the setting
of the SFP parameter “Temperature (ƒC) where maximum fan speed achieved” shown above (which will be referred to by its IVI-COM driver name for
brevity, “MaxRPMTemperature”). MaxRPMTemperature specifies the chassis temperature where the maximum (100% duty cycle) fan speed is
achieved, and is set using the Configure Fan Control dialog – this dialog is opened from the SFP Configure pull down menu. The hottest temperature
reported by the eight temperature sensors is used to control the fan speed as shown in the block diagram. MaxRPMTemperature can be set from 25 ƒC
(right top curve) to 65 ƒC (right bottom curve) in 1 ƒC increments either by entering the value directly or by using the up/down arrow buttons. The default
MaxRPMTemperature parameter is 50 ƒC (right middle curve).
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
25 ƒC
40 ƒC: Temperature where the fan speeds begin
ramping up from 40% duty cycle for the 65 ƒC
highest MaxRPMTemperature
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Note that the chassis doesn’t attempt to maintain its temperature at a particular temperature although it is expected that, in most cases, the chassis
temperature will stabilize before MaxRPMTemperature is reached. To maximize cooling, MaxRPMTemperature should be set lower while, to minimize
fan noise, MaxRPMTemperature should be set higher.
Highest temperature (ƒC) reported by the
eight backplane temperature sensors
Figure 24Setting the temperature using the Soft Front Panel
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
51
Setting the
Temperature
at which the
Maximum
Setting
the Temperature
at which
the Fan
M isi Achieved
Maximum
Fan
F Speed
Susingdthe
is
i Achieved
AIVI-COM
hi
d Driver
using
i and
the
th SFP
Speed
C#
Lowest MaxRPMTemperature setting = 25 °C
C
MAX TEMPERATURE SELECTOR AND FAN DRIVER
Temperature
p
Sensor 1
Generate fan voltage
duty cycle of 100% for
highest speed.
FAN1
Temperature Sensor 3
Temperature Sensor 4
Temperature Sensor 5
Temperature Sensor 6
Temperature Sensor 7
Temperature Sensor 8
HIGH
Select
hottest
temperature
Generate fan voltage
duty cycle based on
the hottest chassis
temperature sensor
and the setting of the
temperature where
maximum fan speed
is achieved.
fan
driver
AUTO
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 °C: Temperature where the fan speeds begin ramping
up from 40% duty cycle for the 25 °C lowest
MaxRPMTemperature
0
FAN2
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Highest temperature (°C) reported by the
eight
g backplane
p
temperature
p
sensors
FAN3
FAN switch
(rear panel)
Reports the position of the FAN switch.
Returns True if FAN switch set to AUTO,
returns False if set to HIGH.
driver.Fans.Control.Auto
This field displays the
position of the Fan Speed
Selector Switch
Switch. This
switch is on the rear panel
and is labeled FAN.
The Allow Control
check box must be
checked in order to
use the functionality
The Configure Fan Control dialog is used to set the parameter “Temperature (°C) where
described on this If the FAN switch is set to AUTO,
maximum fan speeddriver.Fans.Control.MaxRPMTemperature
achieved” – this parameter will be referred to by its IVI–COM driver
diagram.
MaxRPMTemperature sets the
temperature
name,
MaxRPMTemperature. At SFP startup, the SFP reads the chassis value of
at which the fans will be operating
at
MaxRPMTemperature
and inserts that value here. The chassis default value is 50 °C.
Default MaxRPMTemperature setting = 50 °C
C
Fan voltag
ge duty cy
ycle
Temperature Sensor 2
Fa
an voltage
e duty cyc
cle
25 °C: Temperature at which the maximum
fan RPM is achieved
50 °C: Temperature at which the
maximum fan RPM is achieved
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
25 °C
25 °C: Temperature where the fan speeds begin
ramping up from 40% duty cycle for the
50 °C default MaxRPMTemperature
0
Highest temperature (°C) reported by the
eight backplane temperature sensors
maximum RPM.
The M9018A chassis controls the speed of its three fans by
y varying
y g the duty
y cycle
y
of the drive voltage
g to the fans. When the rear panel FAN switch
(referred to as the “Fan Speed Selector Switch”) is set to HIGH, the fan voltage duty cycle is set to 100%, which generates the highest fan speeds and
the best chassis cooling – however, this also generates the most fan noise.
Regardless of the MaxRPMTemperature that is set, the fan speeds begin ramping up at 25 °C below MaxRPMTemperature. For example, if
M RPMT
MaxRPMTemperature
t
iis sett tto 65 °C (b
(bottom
tt
curve),
) th
the ffan speed
db
begins
i ramping
i up att 25 °C b
below
l
thi
this ttemperature,
t
or att 40 °C.
°C At 65 °C,
°C th
the ffan
voltage duty cycle will be 100% (maximum fan speed).
Highest
g
MaxRPMTemperature
p
setting
g = 65 °C
65 °C: Temperature at which the
maximum fan RPM is achieved
Fa
an voltage
e duty cyclle
When the Fan Speed Selector Switch is set to AUTO, the speed of the three fans is controlled based on the temperature of the chassis and the setting
of the SFP parameter “Temperature (°C) where maximum fan speed achieved” shown above (which will be referred to by its IVI-COM driver name for
brevity, “MaxRPMTemperature”). MaxRPMTemperature specifies the chassis temperature where the maximum (100% duty cycle) fan speed is
achieved, and is set using the Configure Fan Control dialog – this dialog is opened from the SFP Configure pull down menu. The hottest temperature
reported by the eight temperature sensors is used to control the fan speed as shown in the block diagram. MaxRPMTemperature can be set from 25 °C
( i ht ttop curve)) tto 65 °C ((right
(right
i ht b
bottom
tt
curve)) iin 1 °C iincrements
t either
ith b
by entering
t i th
the value
l di
directly
tl or b
by using
i th
the up/down
/d
arrow b
buttons.
tt
Th
The d
default
f lt
MaxRPMTemperature parameter is 50 °C (right middle curve).
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
25 °C
40 °C: Temperature where the fan speeds begin
ramping up from 40% duty cycle for the 65 °C
g
MaxRPMTemperature
p
highest
0
Note that the chassis doesn’t attempt to maintain its temperature at a particular temperature although it is expected that, in most cases, the chassis
temperature will stabilize before MaxRPMTemperature is reached.
reached To maximize cooling,
cooling MaxRPMTemperature should be set lower while
while, to minimize
fan noise, MaxRPMTemperature should be set higher.
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Highest temperature (°C) reported by the
eight backplane temperature sensors
Figure 25 Setting the temperature using IVI-COM and C#
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
52
Setting
the Temperature
at which
the Fan
Setting the
Temperature
at which the
Maximum
M
Maximum
i
Fan
F
Speed
S
d
is
i
Achieved
A
hi
d
using
i
thC++
SFP
Speed is Achieved using the IVI-C Driver andthe
Lowest MaxRPMTemperature setting = 25 °C
C
MAX TEMPERATURE SELECTOR AND FAN DRIVER
Temperature
p
Sensor 1
Generate fan voltage
duty cycle of 100% for
highest speed.
FAN1
Temperature Sensor 3
Temperature Sensor 4
Temperature Sensor 5
Temperature Sensor 6
HIGH
Select
hottest
temperature
Generate fan voltage
duty cycle based on
the hottest chassis
temperature sensor
and the setting of the
temperature where
maximum fan speed
is achieved.
fan
driver
AUTO
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 °C: Temperature where the fan speeds begin ramping
up from 40% duty cycle for the 25 °C lowest
MaxRPMTemperature
0
FAN2
FAN3
Reports the position of the FAN switch.
Returns True if the FAN switch is set to
AUTO, returns False if set to HIGH.
Temperature Sensor 7
Temperature Sensor 8
AGM9018_ATTR_FAN_CONTROL_AUTO
This field displays the
position of the Fan Speed
Selector Switch
Switch. This
switch is on the rear panel
and is labeled FAN.
The Allow Control
check box must be
checked in order to
use the functionality
The Configure Fan Control dialog is used to set the parameter “Temperature (°C) where
described on this
If the FAN switch is set to AUTO, this attribute
sets
maximum
fanthe
speed AGM9018_ATTR_FAN_CONTROL_MAX_RPM_TEMPERATURE
achieved” – this parameter will be referred to by its IVI–COM driver
diagram.
name, MaxRPMTemperature.
At SFP startup, the SFP reads the chassis value of
temperature at which the fans will be operating
at
MaxRPMTemperature and inserts that value here. The chassis default value is 50 °C.
maximum RPM.
Default MaxRPMTemperature setting = 50 °C
C
50 °C: Temperature at which the
maximum fan RPM is achieved
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
25 °C
25 °C: Temperature where the fan speeds begin
ramping up from 40% duty cycle for the
50 °C default MaxRPMTemperature
0
Regardless of the MaxRPMTemperature that is set, the fan speeds begin ramping up at 25 °C below MaxRPMTemperature. For example, if
M RPMT
MaxRPMTemperature
t
iis sett tto 65 °C (b
(bottom
tt
curve),
) th
the ffan speed
db
begins
i ramping
i up att 25 °C b
below
l
thi
this ttemperature,
t
or att 40 °C.
°C At 65 °C,
°C th
the ffan
voltage duty cycle will be 100% (maximum fan speed).
Highest
g
MaxRPMTemperature
p
setting
g = 65 °C
65 °C: Temperature at which the
maximum fan RPM is achieved
Fa
an voltage
e duty cyclle
When the Fan Speed Selector Switch is set to AUTO, the speed of the three fans is controlled based on the temperature of the chassis and the setting
of the SFP parameter “Temperature (°C) where maximum fan speed achieved” shown above (which will be referred to by its IVI-COM driver name for
brevity, “MaxRPMTemperature”). MaxRPMTemperature specifies the chassis temperature where the maximum (100% duty cycle) fan speed is
achieved, and is set using the Configure Fan Control dialog – this dialog is opened from the SFP Configure pull down menu. The hottest temperature
reported by the eight temperature sensors is used to control the fan speed as shown in the block diagram. MaxRPMTemperature can be set from 25 °C
( i ht ttop curve)) tto 65 °C ((right
(right
i ht b
bottom
tt
curve)) iin 1 °C iincrements
t either
ith b
by entering
t i th
the value
l di
directly
tl or b
by using
i th
the up/down
/d
arrow b
buttons.
tt
Th
The d
default
f lt
MaxRPMTemperature parameter is 50 °C (right middle curve).
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
25 °C
40 °C: Temperature where the fan speeds begin
ramping up from 40% duty cycle for the 65 °C
g
MaxRPMTemperature
p
highest
0
Note that the chassis doesn’t attempt to maintain its temperature at a particular temperature although it is expected that, in most cases, the chassis
temperature will stabilize before MaxRPMTemperature is reached.
reached To maximize cooling,
cooling MaxRPMTemperature should be set lower while
while, to minimize
fan noise, MaxRPMTemperature should be set higher.
Figure 26
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Highest temperature (°C) reported by the
eight backplane temperature sensors
The M9018A chassis controls the speed of its three fans by
y varying
y g the duty
y cycle
y
of the drive voltage
g to the fans. When the rear panel FAN switch
(referred to as the “Fan Speed Selector Switch”) is set to HIGH, the fan voltage duty cycle is set to 100%, which generates the highest fan speeds and
the best chassis cooling – however, this also generates the most fan noise.
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Highest temperature (°C) reported by the
eight
g backplane
p
temperature
p
sensors
FAN switch
(rear panel)
Fan voltag
ge duty cy
ycle
Temperature Sensor 2
Fa
an voltage
e duty cyc
cle
25 °C: Temperature at which the maximum
fan RPM is achieved
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Highest temperature (°C) reported by the
eight backplane temperature sensors
Setting the temperature using IVI-C and C++
53
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
11
Monitoring the Power Supply Rails
The chassis allows you to monitor the following five power supply rails:
- 3.3V
- 5V
- 5Vaux (This rail is monitored indirectly using the front panel Power LED)
- 12V
- –12V
For a description of these rails, please see Chapter 2, “Power Supply Operation”.
With the exception of the 5Vaux rail, all voltage rails can be viewed using the
SFP, can be read programmatically using the chassis drivers, and can be read
directly on the rear panel DB-9 connector using a voltmeter.
In addition, the SFP and the chassis drivers can be used to set voltage limits
around the rails (again, except for the 5Vaux rail) such that an alarm will be
generated if a rail voltage falls outside of the specified limits. The front panel
Power LED provides collective information about all five rails.
Use of the SFP, the front panel Power LED, and the IVI drivers to monitor the
power supply rails is described in the following three figures:
- Soft front panel (SFP) and the front panel Power LED — Figure 27 on page 56
- Using the IVI-COM driver and C# — Figure 28 on page 57
- Using the IVI-C driver and C++ — Figure 29 on page 58
In rare cases where the 5Vaux is loaded to the point where it deviates outside of
the ±5% tolerance, it can cause the Power LED to blink. Unfortunately, the
5Vaux is not visible through the IVI command layer. Therefore, you will not see
voltage nor alarm change on the Soft Front Panel.
54
Monitoring the Power Supply Rails
55
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Voltage Monitoring using the SFP
and the Front Panel Power LED
The 5Vaux supply provides 5 VDC standby
power to every slot. There is no alarm
5Vaux
associated with the 5Vaux supply. The only upper limit
indicator of an out-of-range condition is the
5Vaux
front panel Power LED. However, this LED
reports on the status of all five voltage rails
5Vaux
on this diagram, not just 5Vaux.
lower limit
3.3V Upper
Voltage
Limit
5Vaux COMPARATOR
Upper voltage limit
5Vaux input
The Configure Alarms Voltage column displays the current
value of each supply; these values are also displayed on the
Monitor tab. Each voltage rail has a Comparator and Voltage
Alarm Set/Reset Latch (“latch”) that are used to detect and store
the occurrence of an out-of-limit power supply condition. The
voltage rail latch is set if the associated voltage rail is outside of
its Upper/Lower Voltage Limits. Setting of the latch allows power
supply issues to be detected/captured in the absence of an
operator. The latch can be reset (cleared) using the
corresponding Clear Alarm button, Reset on the Utility dropdown
menu, or programmatically. However, if the voltage rail is still
outside of its Upper/Lower Voltage Limits when the latch is
cleared, the latch will immediately be set true again.
If a latch is set and if the corresponding Alarm Enabled is True,
Alarm Occurred will be True. Alarm Occurred is held False if
Alarm Enabled is set False; however, setting Alarm Enabled
False does not reset the latch. Likewise, changing the
Upper/Lower Voltage Limits such that the voltage rail is within
the limits resets the latch.
As described in the M9018 User Guide section Relationship
between Alarm Occurred and the front panel LEDs, it is
possible for Alarm Occurred to indicate an out-of-range voltage
condition while the front panel Power LED indicates the
voltages are normal. This situation can occur if a voltage rail
momentarily exceeds its limits (which sets that particular latch)
followed by the voltage rail changing such that the voltage rail is
now within its limits -- this will restore the Power LED to being
on continuously (normal operation).
Note: the internal voltage measurement system has a worst
case accuracy of ±50mV.
The Output of a Comparator will be True if
the power supply voltage is outside of its
upper or lower voltage limit. This will set the
corresponding Set/Reset Latch.
3.3V COMPARATOR
3.3V input
Output
Lower voltage limit
3.3V Lower Voltage Limit
SET
OR
5V COMPARATOR
5V Upper
Voltage
Limit
5V supply
Enabled
12V
Enabled
OR
12V Upper Voltage Limit – For the -12V
rail, the Upper Voltage Limit is more positive
than the nominal voltage of -12V; for
example, -11.4V.
-12V
OR
-12V COMPARATOR
-12V input
AND
RESET
12V Alarm
Occurred
OUT
AND
RESET
-12V Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Output
SET
OUT
-12V Alarm
Occurred
AND
RESET
Lower voltage limit
-12V Lower Voltage Limit – For the -12V rail, the Lower Voltage Limit
is more negative than the nominal voltage of -12V; for example, -12.6.
OUT
SET
Upper voltage limit
Enabled
5V Alarm
Occurred
12V Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Upper voltage limit
Output
12V input
Lower voltage limit
12V Lower Voltage Limit
AND
RESET
SET
12V COMPARATOR
12V Upper
Voltage
Limit
OUT
5V Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Upper voltage limit
Output
5V input
Lower voltage limit
5V Lower Voltage Limit
3.3V Alarm
Occurred
3.3V Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Upper voltage limit
3.3V supply
LED drive logic
Output
Lower voltage limit
Enabled
The Configure Alarms tab is used to set the Upper and Lower
Voltage Limits for each of the four primary voltage rails.
Front panel Power LED
On: The five voltage rails are within their limits
Flashing: One or more voltage rails are outside of
their upper/lower voltage limits
OR
Reset clears all
four voltage latches.
Figure 27 Voltage monitoring using the Soft Front Panel
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
56
Voltage
Monitoring
using
Voltage
Monitoring
using
thethe
SFP
and the
FrontDriver
Panel and
Power
IVI-COM
C# LED
Front panel Power LED
On: The five voltage rails are within their limits
Flashing: One or more voltage rails are outside of
their upper/lower voltage limits
5Vaux COMPARATOR
The 5Vaux supply provides 5 VDC standby
LED drive logic
power to every slot. There is no alarm
5Vaux
Upper voltage limit
associated with the 5Vaux supply. The only upper limit
Output
indicator of an out-of-range condition is the
5Vaux
inputprogrammatic capabilities, the IVI-COM driver properties and methods are overlaid next to
To show
the parallels
between
and the
5Vaux
front
panel Power
LED. However,
this the
LEDSFP capabilities
The Output of a Comparator will be True if
their SFP
counterparts.
reports
on the
status of all five voltage rails
5Vaux
Lower voltage limit
the power supply voltage is outside of its
on this diagram, not just 5Vaux.
lower limit
upper or lower voltage limit. This will set the
It is important to understand how your program interacts with the SFP. If your program and the
SFP (or, for
that matter,
corresponding
Set/Reset
Latch.any other program) are operating
simultaneously, they
will need to share certain chassis resources. 3.3V
Please
see the diagram "Chassis Alarm Architecture" in the M9018A User Guide
COMPARATOR
3.3V Upper
3.3V Alarm
3.3V Alarm
chapter "Overview of
Chassis Management Capabilities" for a description of how the alarm resources are shared
between
multiple processes.
Voltage
Occurred
Set/Reset
Latch
Limit
Upper voltage limit
3.3V supply
Enabled
The Configure Alarms tab is used to set the Upper and Lower
Voltage
Limits for each of the four primary voltage rails.
driver.VoltageRails.get_Item().Alarm.Configure
3.3V input
Output
SET
OR
Lower voltage limit
3.3V Lower Voltage
g Limit
driver.VoltageRails.Count
OUT
AND
RESET
The number of primary power supply voltage rails in
the chassis. Count returns 4 for the M9018A chassis.
The
Configure
Voltage
column
displays
Configures
theAlarms
specified
voltage
alarm
by the current
value of each supply; these values are also displayed on the
5V COMPARATOR
allowing setting of Enabled, and the LowerLimit
5V Alarm
5V Alarm
M it tab.
Monitor
t b E
Each
h voltage
lt
railil h
has a C
Comparator
t and
dV
Voltage
lt
Set/Reset
Latch
Occurred
and
UpperLimit
voltage
limits.
5V
Upper
Upper
voltage
limit
Alarm Set/Reset Latch (“latch”) that are used to detect and store
Returns the power supply rail name for a given index, where index is a 1-based index into the collection of
Voltage
driver.VoltageRails.Name
the occurrence of an out-of-limit power supply condition. The
Output for indices 1-4 are "VPLUS_3_3",
5V supplyvoltage
Limit
rails. The Name properties returned
"VPLUS_12_0",
OUT
Enabled
SET "VPLUS_5_0",
voltage rail latch is set if the associated voltage rail is outside of
5V input
AND
and
"VMINUS_12_0",
respectively.
The
Name
property,
not
the
index,
is
used
in
the
get_Item()
calls.
its Upper/Lower Voltage Limits.
Limits Setting of the latch allows power
OR
supply issues to be detected/captured in the absence of an
RESET
Lower voltage limit
operator. The latch can be reset (cleared) using the
5V Lower Voltage Limit
corresponding Clear Alarm button, Reset on the Utility dropdown
menu or programmatically
menu,
programmatically. However,
However if the voltage rail is still
driver.VoltageRails.get_Item().Alarm.Clear Resets the specified voltage rail alarm set/reset latch. However,
outside of its Upper/Lower Voltage Limits when the latch is
12V COMPARATOR
if the voltage rail is still outside
of the upper or lower
12Vlimits,
Alarmthe
12V Alarm
cleared, the latch will immediately be set trueThe
again.
desired upper voltage limit for the specified voltage
12V Upper
Occurred
Set/Reset
Latch
latch
will
be
immediately
set
True
again.
Upper voltage limit
rail. When a voltage rail exceeds its UpperLimit voltage Voltage
If a latch is set and if the corresponding Alarm Enabled is True,
True
Output
Limit
12V
Enabled
SET OUT
if Enabled
Alarm Occurred will be True. Alarm Occurredand
is held
False if is True for that rail, the voltage alarm
12V input
AND
Occurred
property
will
be
set
True.
Programming
the
Alarm Enabled is set False; however, setting Alarm Enabled
Returns the status of the the specified voltage alarm. If True, this
Returns the power supply voltage of the Lower voltage limit
False does not reset the latch. Likewise, changing
the
UpperLimit
voltage resets the Alarm Latch. However, if
ORvoltage isRESET
indicates that the
outside of the upper/lower limits. This is a
pp
Voltage
g Limits such that the voltage
g
rail
is
within
Upper/Lower
12V
Lower
Voltage
Limit
specified rail in volts, quantized to 1 mV.
the UpperLimit voltage is still exceeded, the Alarm Latch
per-application
property
and
therefore the value reported
the limits resets the latch.
will be set again.
programmatically may be different than the corresponding voltage
Alarm Occurred status reported by the SFP.
driver.VoltageRails.get_Item().Voltage
As described in the M9018 User Guide section Relationship
driver.VoltageRails.get_Item().Alarm.UpperLimit
panel LEDs, it is
between Alarm Occurred and
the front p
possible for Alarm Occurred to indicate an out-of-range voltage
12V Upper Voltage Limit – For the -12V
condition while the front panel Power LED indicates the
rail, the Upper Voltage Limit is more positive
voltages
are normal.
situation
canfor
occur
a voltage rail
The nominal
powerThis
supply
voltage
theifspecified
rail. The
than the nominal voltage of -12V; for
momentarily
exceeds
its limits (which
ExpectedVoltage
properties
for thesets
fourthat
railsparticular
are 3.3,latch)
5.0, 12.0 and
example -11
example,
11.4V.
4V
followed by the voltage rail changing such that the voltage rail is
-12.0
volts.
For
this
example,
the
ExpectedVoltage
is
-12.0
volts.
-12V
now within its limits -- this will restore the Power LED to being
on continuously (normal operation).
driver.VoltageRails.get_Item().Alarm.Occurred
-12V COMPARATOR
-12V Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Upper voltage
g limit
Enabled
-12V input
Output
SET
OUT
-12V Alarm
Occurred
AND
driver.VoltageRails.get_Item().ExpectedVoltage
Note: the internal voltage measurement system has a worst
case accuracy of ±50mV.
RESET
Lower voltage limit
-12V Lower Voltage Limit – For the -12V rail, the Lower Voltage Limit
is more negative than the nominal voltage of -12V; for example, -12.6.
driver.VoltageRails.get_Item().Alarm.LowerLimit
The desired lower voltage limit for the specified voltage rail. When a voltage
rail falls below its LowerLimit voltage and if Enabled is True for that rail, that
voltage alarm Occurred property will be set True. Programming the
LowerLimit voltage resets the Alarm Latch. However, if the voltage rail still
falls below its LowerLimit voltage, the Alarm Latch will be set again.
OR
driver.VoltageRails.get_Item().Alarm.Enabled
Enables or disables generation of an alarm due to the specified voltage rail
being below the LowerLimit or above the UpperLimit. If the voltage rail is
outside either limit, this will set the Alarm Set/Reset Latch True. If Enabled
is True, Occurred will be set True. Enabled default value = True.
driver.Utility.Reset()
Reset
allvoltage
Clearsclears
all four
four voltage latches.
rail latches.
Figure 28 Voltage monitoring using ICI-COM and C#
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
57
Voltage
Monitoring
using
Voltage
Monitoring
using
thethe
SFP
and the
Front
Panel
IVI-C
Driver
andPower
C++ LED
Front panel Power LED
For the 5Vaux supply, the default upper and
On: The five voltage rails are within their limits
lower voltage limits are plus and minus 5%
5Vaux COMPARATOR
LED drive logic
around the nominal value. There is no alarm
Flashing: One or more voltage rails are outside of
their
upper/lower
voltage
limits
associated with the 5Vaux supply. The only
Upper voltage limit
5.25V
indicator of an out-of-range condition is the
Output
panel
LED.between
However, this
5Vaux
inputprogrammatic capabilities, the IVI-C driver attributes and functions are overlaid next to their
5Vaux
Tofront
show
thePower
parallels
theLED
SFP capabilities
and the
reports
t on th
the status
t t off allll five
fi voltage
lt
rails
il
The Output of a Comparator will be True if
SFP
on counterparts.
this diagram, not just 5Vaux.
Lower voltage limit
4.75V
the power supply voltage is outside of its
upper and lower voltage limits. This will set
the SFP
corresponding
Set/Reset
Latch.
It is important to understand how your program interacts with the SFP. If your program and the
(or, for that
matter,
any other program) are operating
simultaneously, they
will need to share certain chassis resources. 3.3V
Please
see the diagram "Chassis Alarm Architecture" in the M9018A User
Guide
COMPARATOR
3.3V Upper
3.3V Alarm
3.3V Alarm
Voltage
chapter "Overview of
Chassis Management Capabilities" for a description of how the alarm resources are shared
between
multiple
processes.
Occurred
Set/Reset Latch
Limit
Upper voltage limit
3.3V supply
Enabled
The Configure Alarms tab is used to set the Upper and Lower
AgM9018_VoltageAlarmConfigure()
Voltage
Limits for each of the four primary voltage rails.
Output
SET
OR
Lower voltage limit
3.3V Lower Voltage
g Limit
AGM9018_ATTR_VOLTAGERAIL_COUNT
Configures
theAlarms
specified
voltage
alarm
by the current
The
Configure
Voltage
column
displays
value
of
each
supply;
these
values
are
also
displayed on the
allowing setting of Enabled, and the LowerLimit
M
Monitor
it
t
tab.
b
E
Each
h
voltage
lt
rail
il
h
has
a
C
Comparator
t and
dV
Voltage
lt
and UpperLimit voltage limits.
3.3V input
OUT
AND
RESET
The number of primary power supply voltage rails in
the chassis. Count returns 4 for the M9018A chassis.
5V COMPARATOR
5V Alarm
5V Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Occurred
5V Upper
Upper voltage limit
Voltage
Returns the power supply rail name for a given index, where index is a 1-based index into the collection of
AgM9018_GetVoltageRailName()
Output
5V supply
Limit
OUT
Enabled
SET "VPLUS_5_0",
voltage
rails. The Name
properties returned for indices 1-4 are "VPLUS_3_3",
"VPLUS_12_0",
5V input
AND
Alarm Set/Reset Latch (“latch”) that are used to detect and store
the occurrence of an out-of-limit power supply condition. The
voltage rail latch is set if the associated voltage rail is outside of
its Upper/Lower Voltage Limits.
Limits Setting of the latch allows power
supply issues to be detected/captured in the absence of an
operator. The latch can be reset (cleared) using the
corresponding Clear Alarm button, Reset on the Utility dropdown
menu or programmatically
menu,
programmatically. However,
However if the voltage rail is still
outside of its Upper/Lower Voltage Limits when the latch is
cleared, the latch will immediately be set true again.
and "VMINUS_12_0", respectively. The Name property, not the index, is used in the get_Item() calls.
OR
RESET
Lower voltage limit
5V Lower Voltage Limit
AgM9018_VoltageAlarmClear() Resets the specified voltage rail alarm set/reset latch. However,
12V COMPARATOR
12V Upper
The desired upper voltage limit for the specified voltage
Voltagerail.
If a latch is set and if the corresponding Alarm Enabled is True,
True
Limit
When
a
voltage
rail
exceeds
its
UpperLimit
voltage
and
if
Alarm Occurred will be True. Alarm Occurred is set False if
Enabled
is
True
for
that
rail,
the
voltage
alarm
Occurred
Alarm Enabled is set False; however, setting Alarm Enabled
False does not reset the latch. Likewise, changing the
property will be set True. Programming the UpperLimit voltage
pp
Voltage
g Limits such that the voltage
g rail
is within
Upper/Lower
Lower
Voltage voltage
Limit
resets
the Alarm Latch. However, 12V
if the
UpperLimit
is
the limits does not reset the latch.
still exceeded, the Alarm Latch will be set again.
12V
Enabled
Upper voltage limit
Output
12V input
Lower voltage
Returns the power supply voltage
of the limit
specified rail in volts, quantized to 1 mV.
AGM9018_ATTR_VOLTAGE
As described in the M9018 User Guide section Relationship
AGM9018_ATTR_VOLTAGE_ALARM_UPPER_LIMIT
panel LEDs, it is
between Alarm Occurred and the front p
possible for Alarm Occurred to indicate an out-of-range voltage
12V Upper Voltage Limit – For the -12V
condition while the front panel Power LED indicates the
rail, the Upper Voltage Limit is more positive
-12V COMPARATOR
The
nominal
power
supply
voltage
for
the
specified
rail.
The
voltages are normal. This situation can occur if a voltage rail
than the nominal voltage of -12V; for
momentarily
exceeds properties
its limits (which
sets
thatrails
particular
latch)
ExpectedVoltage
for the
four
are 3.3,
5.0, 12.0 and
Upper
voltage
g limit
example -11
example,
11.4V.
4V
followed
by theFor
voltage
changing
such
that the voltage rail
is
-12.0 volts.
this rail
example,
the
ExpectedVoltage
is -12.0
volts.
-12V
Enabled
Output
now within its limits -- this will restore the Power LED to being
-12V input
on continuously (normal operation).
AGM9018_ATTR_EXPECTED_VOLTAGE
if the voltage rail is still outside
of the upper or lower
12Vlimits,
Alarmthe
12V Alarm
Occurred
Set/Reset
Latch
latch will be immediately
set True
again.
SET OUT
AND
Returns the status of the the specified voltage alarm. If True, this
indicates that the
outside of the upper/lower limits. This is a
ORvoltage isRESET
per-application property and therefore the value reported
programmatically may be different than the corresponding voltage
Alarm Occurred status reported by the SFP.
AGM9018_ATTR_VOLTAGE_ALARM_OCCURRED
-12V Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
SET
AGM9018_ATTR_VOLTAGE_ALARM_LOWER_LIMIT
The desired lower voltage limit for the specified voltage rail. When a voltage
rail falls below its LowerLimit voltage and if Enabled is True for that rail, that
voltage alarm Occurred property will be set True. Programming the
LowerLimit voltage resets the Alarm Latch. However, if the voltage rail still
falls below its LowerLimit voltage, the Alarm Latch will be set again.
AND
RESET
Lower voltage limit
-12V Lower Voltage Limit – For the -12V rail, the Lower Voltage Limit
is more negative than the nominal voltage of -12V; for example, -12.6.
OUT
-12V Alarm
Occurred
OR
AGM9018_ATTR_VOLTAGE_ALARM_ENABLED
Enables or disables generation of an alarm due to the specified voltage rail
being below the LowerLimit or above the UpperLimit. If the voltage rail is
outside either limit, this will set the Alarm Set/Reset Latch True. If Enabled
is True, Occurred will be set True. Enabled default value = True.
AgM9018_reset()
Reset clears all
Clears
all four
voltage
four
voltage
latches.
rail latches.
Figure 29 Voltage monitoring using ICI-C and C++
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
58
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
12
Monitoring the 10 MHz Reference
Clock Source
Chassis timing is based on a 10 MHz reference clock. The 10 MHz reference clock
can originate from the three sources listed below. These sources are listed in the
order of precedence from low to high if multiple 10 MHz reference clock sources
are available:
1 Chassis internal 10 MHz clock
2 Rear panel 10 MHz clock (connected to the chassis through a BNC connector)
3 System timing slot (slot 10) 10 MHz clock
A clock source with a higher number supersedes a clock source with a lower
number if both are present. For example, if both a rear panel 10 MHz clock (#2)
and a system timing slot 10 MHz clock (#3) are provided, the system timing slot
10 MHz clock (#3) will be used by the chassis to generate its internal timing
signals.
There are no means to override this order of precedence; for example, there are
no means to select the rear panel 10 MHz clock if a system timing slot clock is
present. The module in the system timing slot would need to be removed from
the chassis in order to activate selection of the rear panel 10 MHz clock.
The chassis references either the rear panel 10 MHz clock or the system timing
slot 10 MHz clock as long as the clock frequency remains within the
specification range of ±100 ppm. The chassis clocks are undefined if the
reference clock is outside of this range.
Monitoring the 10 MHz clock source
Use of the SFP and the IVI drivers to monitor the 10 MHz reference clock source
is described in the following three diagrams:
- Using the SFP — Figure 30 on page 61
- Using the IVI-COM driver and C# — Figure 31 on page 62
- Using the IVI-C driver and C++ — Figure 32 on page 63
59
Monitoring the 10 MHz Reference Clock Source
60
Monitoring the 10 MHz clock source
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
10 MHz Reference Clock Source Monitoring Using the SFP
The Monitor tab allows the source of the 10 MHz
reference clock to be monitored. This tab also
provides the 10 MHz reference clock source
change Alarm Occurred indicator and the Clear
Alarm button, which are described below.
Clock Selector
Selects chassis
reference clock
based on order of
precedence. Also
detects change in
clock source
Internal 10 MHz clock
External 10 MHz clock
(if available)
System timing slot 10 MHz clock
(if available)
Chassis 10 MHz
Clock reference clock
Output
10 MHz Reference Clock
Source Change Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Momentarily True when
the 10 MHz reference
Clock Source clock source changes
SET OUT
Change
AND
10 MHz Reference Clock
Source Change Alarm
RESET
The order of clock precedence is as follows:
1. Chassis internal 10 MHz clock
2. Rear panel external 10 MHz clock
3. System timing slot (slot 10) 10 MHz clock
A clock source with a higher number supersedes a clock
source with a lower number if both are present. For example,
if both a rear panel 10 MHz clock (#2) and a system timing
slot 10 MHz clock (#3) are provided, the system timing slot 10
MHz clock (#3) will be used by the chassis as its reference
clock to generate its internal timing signals.
OR
Clear Alarm
The 10 MHz Reference Clock Source Change Alarm Set/Reset Latch (“latch”) is
set whenever the source of the 10 MHz reference clock changes. Setting the
latch allows a clock source change to be detected/captured in the absence of an
operator. The latch is reset (cleared) at power-on. The latch can also be reset
using the Clear Alarm button, Reset on the SFP Utility dropdown menu, or
programmatically.
If the latch output is True and if Alarm Enabled is true, Alarm Occurred will be
True. Alarm Occurred is set False if Alarm Enabled is set False. However, setting
Alarm Enabled False does not reset the latch—this can only be done using Clear
Alarm, Reset on the SFP Utility dropdown menu, or programmatically.
The Configure Alarms tab is used to enable the
10 MHz Reference Clock Source Change Alarm.
Alarm Enabled
Default value = True (checked)
Figure 30 10MHz Reference Clock monitoring using the Soft Front Panel
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
61
MHz
Reference
Clock
Source
Monitoring
using
the SFP
10 10
MHz
Reference
Clock
Source
Monitoring
using
IVI-COM
and C#
Th Monitor
The
M it tab
t b allows
ll
the
th source off th
the 10 MHz
MH
reference clock to be monitored. The valid values
are: driver.ReferenceClock.Source
• Internal Clock
• External Clock
Returns
• ?? the current 10 MHz reference clock
source. The three possible returned values are:
This tab also provides the 10 MHz reference clock
sourceAgM9018RefClockSourceInternal
change Alarm Occurred indicator and the
AgM9018RefClockSourceExternal
Clear Alarm
button,
button which are described below
below.
Clock Selector
Selects chassis
reference clock
based on order of
precedence. Also
detects change in
clock source
Internal 10 MHz clock
External 10 MHz clock
(if available)
System timing slot 10 MHz clock
(if available)
AgM9018RefClockSourceTimingModule
Chassis 10 MHz
Clock reference clock
O t t
Output
10 MHz
MH Reference
R f
Cl
Clock
k
Source Change Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Momentarily True when
the 10 MHz reference
oc sou
source
ce cchanges
a ges
Clock Source cclock
Change
SET OUT
10 MHz
Reference Clock
driver.ReferenceClock.Occurred
Source Change Alarm
AND
RESET
The order of clock precedence is as follows:
Returns the status of the alarm. If True, this indicates
that the 10 MHz reference clock source has changed.
This is a per-application property and therefore may be
different than the SFP Alarm Occurred indicator.
driver.ReferenceClock.Alarm.Clear()
1. Chassis internal 10 MHz clock
2. Rear panel 10 MHz clock
Clears the 10 MHz
3 System
3.
S t
timing
ti i slot
l t (slot
( l t 10) 10 MHz
MH clock
l k
Reference Clock Source
A clock source with a higher number supersedes a clock
Change Alarm Latch
Clear Alarm
source with a lower number if both are present. For example,
if both a rear panel 10 MHz clock (#2) and a system timing
slot
l 10 MHz
MH clock
l k (#3) are provided,
id d the
h system timing
i i slot
l 10
MHz clock (#3) will be used by the chassis as its reference
clock to generate its internal timing signals.
OR
The 10 MHz Reference Clock Source Change Alarm Set/Reset Latch (“latch”) is
set whenever the source of the 10 MHz reference clock changes. Setting the
latch allows a clock source change to be detected/captured in the absence of an
operator. The latch is reset (cleared) at power-on. The latch can also be reset
using the Clear Alarm button or Reset on the SFP Utility dropdown menu.
driver.Utility.Reset() Re-establishes all chassis default
values, including clearing this latch.
If the latch output is True and if Alarm Enabled is true, Alarm Occurred will be lit.
Al
Alarm
O
Occurred
d iis sett ffalse
l if Al
Alarm E
Enabled
bl d iis sett ffalse.
l
H
However, setting
tti Al
Alarm
Enabled false does not reset the latch—this can only be done using Clear Alarm
or Reset.
driver.ReferenceClock.Alarm.Enabled
Used to enable or disable the
10 MHz reference clock
source change alarm
The Configure Alarms tab is used to enable the
10 MHz Reference Clock Source Change Alarm.
Alarm Enabled
Default value = True (checked)
Figure 31 10MHz Reference Clock monitoring using IVI-COM and C#
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
62
1010MHz
Clock
Monitoring
and C++
MHz
MH Reference
Reference
R f
Clock
Cl kSource
Source
S
Monitoring
M i i using
U
Using
i IVI-C
the
h SFP
AGM9018_ATTR_REFCLK_SOURCE
The Monitor tab allows the source of the 10 MHz
Returns the current the 10 MHz reference clock source. The
reference clock to be monitored. This tab also
threethe
possible
are:
provides
10 MHzreturned
referencevalues
clock source
changeAGM9018_VAL_REF_CLOCK_SOURCE_INTERNAL
Alarm Occurred indicator and the Clear
Alarm AGM9018_VAL_REF_CLOCK_SOURCE_EXTERNAL
button, which are described below.
Clock Selector
Selects chassis
reference clock
based on order of
precedence. Also
detects change in
clock source
Internal 10 MHz clock
External 10 MHz clock
(if available)
System timing slot 10 MHz clock
(if available)
AGM9018_VAL_REF_CLOCK_SOURCE_TIMING_MODULE
Chassis 10 MHz
Clock reference clock
O t t
Output
10 MHz
MH Reference
R f
Cl
Clock
k
Source Change Alarm
Set/Reset Latch
Momentarily True when
the 10 MHz reference
oc sou
source
ce cchanges
a ges
Clock Source cclock
Change
SET OUT
RESET
The order of clock precedence is as follows:
1. Chassis internal 10 MHz clock
2. Rear panel external 10 MHz clock
3 System
3.
S t
timing
ti i slot
l t (slot
( l t 10) 10 MHz
MH clock
l k
A clock source with a higher number supersedes a clock
source with a lower number if both are present. For example,
if both a rear panel 10 MHz clock (#2) and a system timing
slot 10 MHz clock (#3) are provided, the system timing slot 10
MHz clock (#3) will be used by the chassis as its reference
clock to generate its internal timing signals.
AgM9018_RefClkAlarmClear()
Clears the 10 MHz
Reference Clock Source
Change Alarm Latch
Re-establishes all chassis default
values, including clearing this latch.
OR
Clear Alarm
AGM9018_ATTR_REFCLK_ALARM_OCCURRED
AND
10 MHz Reference
Returns
the status Clock
of the alarm. If True, this indicates that the
Source Change Alarm
10 MHz reference clock source has changed. This is a
per-application property and therefore may be different than
the SFP Alarm Occurred indicator.
The 10 MHz Reference Clock Source Change Alarm Set/Reset Latch (“latch”) is
set whenever the source of the 10 MHz reference clock changes. Setting the
latch allows a clock source change to be detected/captured in the absence of an
operator. The latch is reset (cleared) at power-on. The latch can also be reset
using the Clear Alarm button, Reset on the SFP Utility dropdown menu, or
programmatically.
If the
th latch
l t h output
t t is
i True
T
and
d if Alarm
Al
Enabled
E bl d is
i ttrue, Al
Alarm O
Occurred
d will
ill b
be
True. Alarm Occurred is set False if Alarm Enabled is set False. However, setting
Alarm Enabled False does not reset the latch—this can only be done using Clear
Alarm, Reset on the SFP Utility dropdown menu, or programmatically.
AgM9018_reset()
AGM9018_ATTR_REFCLK_ALARM_ENABLED
Used to enable or disable the
10 MHz reference clock
source change alarm
The Configure Alarms tab is used to enable the
10 MHz Reference Clock Source Change Alarm.
Alarm Enabled
Default value = True (checked)
Figure 32 10MHz Reference Clock monitoring using IVI-C and C++
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
63
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
13
Configuring the PXI Trigger Bus
This chapter describes how to configure the PXI trigger bus. To view the PXI
trigger bus, see the “M9018A Block Diagram” on page 4, and click the
PXI_TRIG[0:7] check box under the Show Triggers label. As you’ll see, the PXI
trigger bus consists of eight trigger lines spanning the XP4 backplane
connectors. The trigger lines are divided into three trigger bus segments,
numbered 1-3.
Figure 33 shows the eight combinations of trigger bus segment connections that
are possible between the three trigger bus segments. Any of these combinations
can be applied to each of the eight trigger lines PXI_TRIG[0:7].
PXI Trigger
gg Bus
Segment 1
PXI Trigger
gg Bus
Segment 2
PXI Trigger
gg Bus
Segment 3
(slots 1-6)
(slots 7-12)
(slots 13-18)
All segments isolated
Segment 1 to Segment 2
(1 2)
Segment 1 to Segments 2 & 3
(1 2 3)
Segment 2 to Segment 1
(1 2)
Segment 2 to Segment 3
(2 3)
Segment 2 to Segments 1 & 3
(1 2 3)
S
Segment
t 3 tto Segment
S
t2
(2 3)
Segment 3 to Segments 1 & 2
(1 2 3)
NOTES:
• Trigger sources are shown as solid circles while trigger destinations are shown as squares
squares.
• Below each segment description on the left side is the notation used by the SFP, in
parenthesis.
Figure 33
The eight combinations of trigger bus segment connections
between trigger bus segments
64
Configuring the PXI Trigger Bus
Configuring PXI trigger bus connections
Care should be taken to avoid confusing the eight combinations of trigger bus
segment connections with the eight trigger lines of the PXI_TRIG[0:7] bus.
Again, any one of the eight trigger bus segment combinations in Figure 33 can
be applied to each of the eight trigger lines PXI_TRIG[0:7].
Some PXI modules, such as the M9381A use peer-to-peer (module-to-module)
triggering across the chassis backplane. Therefore, when installing these
modules, ensure that all necessary modules are installed in one of the three bus
segments.
Configuring PXI trigger bus connections
The PXI trigger bus can be configured using the SFP or programmatically. Use of
the SFP is described first followed by a description of using the IVI drivers.
Using the SFP to configure PXI trigger bus connections
Figure 34 shows the SFP Configure Trigger Bus tab that is used to configure the PXI
trigger bus connections. At this point, no configuration has been performed and
all trigger bus segments are isolated.
Figure 34
65
SFP Configure Trigger Bus tab
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Configuring PXI trigger bus connections
Configuring the PXI Trigger Bus
To configure the trigger bus segment connection for each of the eight trigger
lines (PXI TRIG 0 through PXI TRIG 7), use the drop down menus under the
Configuration label on the right side of the screen. Note that the Allow Control
check box in the upper left corner must be checked to use these drop down
menus.
In Figure 35, four of the eight PXI trigger lines have been configured using the
dropdown menus. The remaining PXI TRIG lines are still isolated.
Figure 35
Configuration of four of the eight PXI TRIG trigger lines between the
trigger bus segments
Using the IVI drivers to configure trigger bus connections
Use of the IVI drivers to configure the PXI triggers is described in the following
two diagrams:
- Using the IVI-COM driver and C# — Figure 36 on page 68
- Using the IVI-C driver and C++ — Figure 36 on page 68
The M9018A does not retain the trigger bus configuration when power is
removed from the chassis.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
66
Configuring the PXI Trigger Bus
67
Configuring PXI trigger bus connections
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Configuring the PXI Trigger Bus using the IVI-COM Driver and C#
Example instantiation of an AgM9018 driver class: driver = new Keysight.AgM9018.Interop.AgM9018()
Perhaps the best way to understand how the different combinations of trigger bus
segment connections can be applied to each of the PXI_TRIG lines is to use the
SFP Configure Trigger Bus tab as shown below. Each row represents one of
the
PXI_TRIG
The
down
menus in
Configuration
can
h eight
i h PXI
TRIG lines.
li
Th drop
d
d
i the
h C
fi
i column
l
be used to apply one of the eight trigger bus segment connections to each
PXI_TRIG line.
This diagram shows the eight combinations of trigger bus segment connections
between the three trigger bus segments. Any combination can be applied to
each of the eight PXI
PXI_TRIG
lines.
TRIG lines
PXI Trigger Bus
Segment 1
PXI Trigger Bus
Segment 2
PXI Trigger Bus
Segment 3
(slots 1-6)
(slots 7-12)
(slots 13-18)
Member name
Value
AgM9018TrigBusIsolateAll
0x00000000
AgM9018TrigBus1To2
0x00000000
AgM9018TrigBus1To2To3
0x00000002
Segment 2 to Segment 1
(1 2)
AgM9018TrigBus2To1
0x00000003
Segment 2 to Segment 3
(2 3)
AgM9018TrigBus2To3
0x00000004
All segments isolated
Segment 1 to Segment 2
(1 2)
Segment 1 to Segments 2 & 3
(1 2 3)
Segment 2 to Segments 1 & 3
(1 2 3)
Segment 3 to Segment 2
(2 3)
Segment 3 to Segments 1 & 2
(1 2 3)
AgM9018TrigBus2To1And3 0x00000005
AgM9018TrigBus3To2
0x00000006
AgM9018TrigBus3To2To1
0x00000007
NOTES:
• Trigger sources are shown as solid circles while trigger destinations are shown as squares.
• Below each segment description on the left side is the notation used by the SFP
SFP, in parenthesis
parenthesis.
driver.TriggerBus.ConnectDefault()
d i
driver.TriggerBus.Connect()
T i
B
C
t()
d i
driver.TriggerBus.Connection()
T i
B
C
ti ()
driver.TriggerBus.DisconnectAll()
This method connects the specified trigger line (0-7)
between the specified trigger bus segment(s), 1, 2, and 3.
The values of the trigger bus segment specifiers are listed
above, adjacent to the connections that they specify.
Based on the specified trigger line (0-7), this method
returns one of the values shown above describing how
trigger line is configured.
f
f
the specified
Figure 36
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
Both of the above methods currently disconnect all
i ht PXI_TRIG[0:7]
PXI TRIG[0 7] trigger
ti
li
t i each
h line
li to
t
lines,
returning
eight
the state shown in the top row of the left diagram.
Configuring the PXI Trigger Bus using IVI-COM and C#
68
Configuring the PXI Trigger Bus using the IVI-C Driver and C++
Perhaps the best way to understand how the different combinations of trigger bus
segment connections can be applied to each of the PXI_TRIG lines is to use the
SFP Configure Trigger Bus tab as shown below. Each row represents one of
the eight PXI_TRIG
PXI TRIG lines.
lines The drop down menus in the Configuration column can
be used to apply one of the eight trigger bus segment connections to each
PXI_TRIG line.
This diagram shows the eight combinations of trigger bus segment connections
between the three trigger bus segments. Any combination can be applied to
each of the eight PXI
PXI_TRIG
TRIG lines.
lines
PXI Trigger Bus
Segment 1
PXI Trigger Bus
Segment 2
PXI Trigger Bus
Segment 3
(slots 1-6)
(slots 7-12)
(slots 13-18)
Member name
Value
AgM9018TrigBusIsolateAll
0x00000000
AgM9018TrigBus1To2
0x00000000
AgM9018TrigBus1To2To3
0x00000002
Segment 2 to Segment 1
(1 2)
AgM9018TrigBus2To1
0x00000003
Segment 2 to Segment 3
(2 3)
AgM9018TrigBus2To3
0x00000004
All segments isolated
Segment 1 to Segment 2
(1 2)
Segment 1 to Segments 2 & 3
(1 2 3)
Segment 2 to Segments 1 & 3
(1 2 3)
AgM9018TrigBus2To1And3 0x00000005
Segment 3 to Segment 2
(2 3)
Segment 3 to Segments 1 & 2
(1 2 3)
AgM9018TrigBus3To2
0x00000006
AgM9018TrigBus3To2To1
0x00000007
NOTES:
• Trigger sources are shown as solid circles while trigger destinations are shown as squares.
• Below each segment description on the left side is the notation used by the SFP
SFP, in parenthesis
parenthesis.
AgM9018_TriggerBusConnectDefault()
A M9018 T i
AgM9018_TriggerBusConnect()
B C
t()
A M9018 T i
AgM9018_TriggerBusConnection()
B C
ti ()
AgM9018_TriggerBusDisconnect()
This function connects the specified trigger line (0-7)
between the specified trigger bus segment(s), 1, 2, and 3.
Th values
The
l
off th
the ttrigger
i
b
bus segmentt specifiers
ifi
are
listed above, adjacent to the connections that they
specify.
Based on the specified trigger line (0-7), this
function returns one of the value s shown above
f
trigger line is
describing how the specified
configured.
Figure 37
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
Both of the above methods currently disconnect all
eight PXI_TRIG[0:7] trigger lines, returning each line to
the state shown in the top row of the left diagram.
Configuring the PXI Trigger Bus using IVI-C and C++
69
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
14
Changing and Restoring the PCIe
Link Configuration
PCIe link configuration refers to how the chassis PCIe Switch Fabric is configured
to connect PCI Express signals between slot 1, the system controller slot, and the
other chassis slots. For a review of the supported PCIe link configurations, please
see the “M9018A Block Diagram” on page 4. The check boxes in the upper left
corner of the block diagram can be used to view each PCIe link configuration.
As shown on the block diagram, the chassis ships from the factory in “2-Link
Configuration: 1x8”. This configuration, referred to as “1x8”, provides one x8 PCIe
link from the system controller slot to the PCIe Switch Fabric. Use the 1x8
configuration when using the M9021A PCIe Cable Interface module connected to
laptop computer PCIe adapters such as the M9045A/B. This link can be routed
by the PCIe Switch Fabric to the chassis slots as either x4 or x8 links as shown on
the block diagram.
The other supported PCIe link configurations are:
- 2-Link Configuration: 1x8 [Limited to PCIe Gen1 speed] — (Abbreviated as 1x8
(Gen 1) in this manual.) This fabric is specifically for use in secondary chassis
in multi-chassis configurations. For details, refer to Keysight's Multiple PXIe
and AXIe Chassis Configuration tool. This tool is available on the M9018A
Product information CD as well as on line at:
www.keysight.com/find/pxie-multichassis.
- 2-Link Configuration: 2x8 — Referred to as “2x8”, this configuration provides two
x8 links from the system controller slot to the PCIe Switch Fabric. Link 2 can
be routed by the PCIe Switch Fabric to slots 2-9, while Link 1 can be routed to
slots 10-18.
- 4-Link Configuration: 4x4 — Referred to as “4x4”, this configuration provides four
x4 links from the system controller slot to the PCIe Switch Fabric. Link 1 can
be routed by the PCIe Switch Fabric to slots 10-14, Link 2 can be routed to
slots 15-18, Link 3 can be routed to slots 2-5, and Link 4 can be routed to
slots 6-9.
70
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Figure 38 shows that part of the block diagram that relates to the PCIe link
configurations. The chassis provides storage for two configurations, referred to
as the User Configuration and the Base Configuration. The Base Configuration is
1x8 and is set at the factory. It is read-only and cannot be changed. The User
Configuration can be set by the user to either 2x8 or 4x4. This is done by using
the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator (“Configurator”) program.
Figure 38
User and Base Configurations
The virtual switch shown in Figure 38 determines which configuration is loaded
into the PCIe Switch Fabric. As shipped from the factory, the virtual switch is set
to the Base position, and the Base Configuration is set to 1x8. This ensures that
the factory default PCIe link configuration is 1x8. Figure 39 shows that the
first-ever PCIe Reset signal received by the chassis from the host PC loads the
1x8 configuration into the PCIe Switch Fabric.
Chassis power
(High = powered on)
PC rebooted or restarted,
which generates the
g
PCIe Reset signal.
PCIe Reset from
the host PC
(Low = reset)
PCIe Switch Fabric
Assume that this is the
first-ever PCIe Reset signal
received by the chassis.
Undefined until a
PCIe Reset occurs
1x8
Because this is the first
first-ever
ever PCIe Reset, the
virtual switch is in the Base Configuration: 1x8
position. This loads the 1x8 configuration into
the PCIe Switch Fabric.
Figure 39
The first-ever PCIe Reset signal loads the 1x8 PCIe Switch Fabric
Note that the PCIe Switch Fabric is undefined between when the chassis is
powered on and when the PCIe Reset signal occurs.
71
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Selecting a Link Configuration
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
The position of the virtual switch depends on the selection you make using the
Configurator program. Because the virtual switch position is stored in chassis
non-volatile memory, the switch position persists through chassis power cycles.
Selecting a Link Configuration
Changing the PCIe fabric to one that is incompatible with your
system controller can result in you no longer being able to
connect with your M9018 chassis from your controller.
Use Table 3 to determine the fabric link settings for a single chassis or for a
master chassis (a master chassis cascades from its peripheral slot(s) to one or
more secondary chassis). Use Table 4 for the fabric link settings for secondary
chassis.
If you are using the M9018A in a multiple chassis arrangement,
make certain you have the latest chassis firmware (with fabric
links) installed. Chassis firmware updates are available at:
www.keysight.com/find/M9018A.
Table 3
Single or Master Chassis Fabric Link Settings
Single Chassis or Master Chassis Configuration
1x8 (Factory
Defaul t) Link
1x8 (Gen
1) Link
2x8 Link
4x4 Link

External controller connected to an M9021A module
installed in slot 1.
See Note 3
M9036A or M9037A PCIe Embedded Controller in slot 1.
See Note 1
Other non-Keysight Embedded Controller in slot 1.
See Note 1

See Note 2
See Note 4


Note 1:
- The 1x8 (Factory Default) fabric is the default fabric you will boot with when
the M9018A PCIe fabric reset button is pressed at boot.
- Although all PXI System Modules can function using the 1x8 (Factory Default)
fabric, it is not recommended for normal use with System Modules other than
the M9021A due to better performance with the other fabrics, and the
possibility of PXI Standard compliance issues with other system modules.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
72
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Selecting a Link Configuration
Note 2:
- The M9018A 2x8 fabric is recommended when using the Keysight M9036A
Controller for performance reasons because it facilitates x8 connectivity to the
x8 slots of the M9018A chassis (slots 2, 6, 11, and 15).
Note 3:
- An M9021A will function with either the 1x8 (Factory Default) fabric, or the
1x8 (Gen1) fabric. However, using the 1x8 (Factory Default) fabric is capable
of better Gen2 PCIe performance and is preferred for all cases when the
M9018 chassis is NOT a secondary chassis cascaded from another M9018
Chassis peripheral slot.
Note 4:
- Some non-Keysight system modules and embedded controllers cannot
operate with the M9018A configured to the 2x8 fabric, and therefore, this
fabric is not normally recommended for non-Keysight system modules.
Table 4
Secondary Chassis Fabric Link Settings
Secondary Chassis Configuration
M9021A Cable Interface card in slot 1 of the second M9018A
chassis connected to the PCI ExpressCard port of a M9036A or
PCIe cable port on an M9037A embedded controller in the
master M9018A chassis.
M9021A Cable Interface card in slot 1 of the second M9018A
chassis cascaded from a M9021A card in a peripheral slot of
the master M9018A chassis.
1x8 (Factory
Defaul t) Link
1x8 (Gen 1)
Link
2x8 Link
4x4
Link


See Note 5
Note 5:
- In M9018 Cascaded systems where an M9021 interface is used at each end of
the connecting PCIe cable, the 1x8 (Gen 1) fabric is used in the secondary
M9018 chassis to ensure PCIe signal fidelity. Note: this configuration is not
supported with the M9037A Embedded Controller.
- See the Keysight Multiple PXIe and AXIe Chassis Configuration tool. for
details on use of this fabric and the configuration of M9021 modules for
Cascading M9018 chassis. This tool is available on the M9018A Product
information CD as well as on line at: www.keysight.com/find/M9018A.
- Configure an M9018 chassis for the Gen 1 fabric by first connecting it directly
to a controller (remote PC or M9036) and using the M9018 fabric
configuration tool to set this fabric.
73
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Selecting a Link Configuration
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Additional Fabric Information
- When using 2x8 or 4x4 links, there are two performance gains that are really
slot independent but imply slot performance. By creating two links (2x8) into
the system instead of four (4x4), you get a wider communication link back to
the host controller. This means that we do not explicitly impose restriction on
a x8 module's bandwidth if it were available. A x8 module would connect at x8
in the four M9018A slots that support x8 lane width (see chassis block
diagram on page 4).
- 4x4 links provide the best Peer-to-Peer (P2P) communication which means
any P2P communication occurring between slots will not have to route up to
the host (reducing congestion to the host link as well as packet latency) as
well allowing more devices to communicate within a segment.
- If you accidently reconfigure the chassis fabric to an invalid configuration, use
another system module that is compliant with this M9018A fabric to allow you
to operate the M9018A PCIe Fabric Configurator to restore the M9018A fabric
back to a usable fabric. Alternately, use the M9018A Load Base Configuration
Pushbutton to restore the default 1x8 fabric to allow you to again operate the
M9018A chassis.
For example, on earlier M9018A driver releases, if you are using the M9021
interface card, and you then accidentally reconfigure the M9018A fabric to
4x4 fabric, you will then find after a reboot that you can no longer see the
M9018A chassis instrument via the Keysight M9021 interface (see table
above).
To restore an M9018A configuration that will work with the M9021 interface,
you can do one of two things:
– Reboot with a slot 1 System Module that functions with the M9018A 4x4
fabric, and then run the PCIe Fabric Configurator to restore the original
M9018A 1x8 fabric. Then reboot with the M9021 cable interface.
– Refer to “Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base
Configuration” on page 87 to restore the default M9018A fabric. (Note: this
procedure requires disassembly of the M9018A casing.)
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
74
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
If your chassis is in its factory default configuration (1x8) and your system
controller slot module uses the 1x8 configuration, there is no need to use the
Configurator program to change the PCIe link configuration. The Keysight M9021A
Cable Interface module, for example, uses the 1x8 configuration. Because 1x8 is
the factory default PCIe link configuration, this module will work with the chassis
without changing its configuration.
The M9036A Embedded Controller will operate with any PCIe Switch Fabric: 1x8,
2x8, or 4x4. You should use the Configurator program to change the PCIe Switch
Fabric from 1x8 to 2x8 or 4x4, depending on your application.
Using the Configurator program requires that the host controller PC recognizes
the presence of the chassis as evidenced by “Keysight Technologies M9018”
being displayed in Connection Expert. If your chassis is not displayed by
Connection Expert, you won’t be able to use the Configurator program to
change the PCIe link configuration.
If your chassis is configured for a fabric other than the 1x8 fabric and you are
using the M9021A PCIe Cable Interface module, you may lose PCIe connectivity
to the internal M9018A chassis device. With the Keysight M9018A chassis
driver releases prior to revision 1.4.xx.xx, only the 1x8 fabric placed the internal
M9018A PCIe device in Link 1, thus, for the earlier 2x8 and 4x4 fabrics the
M9021A could not access the internal M9018A device through its single PCIe
link. Chassis PCIe fabrics installed after the M9018A driver revision 1.4.xx.xx
and later always place the M9018A device on Link 1 so these later fabrics allow
M9021A users to use the Configurator program even on 2x8 and 4x4 fabrics.
Fabric installed from M9018A
PXIe Chassis Driver version:
PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program can
function using these fabrics through an M9021A
Cable Interface module.
1x8
2x8
4x4
1.4.xx.xx
Yes
No
No
 1.4.xx.xx
Yes
Yes
Yes
After using Connection Expert to verify the presence of the M9018A chassis,
close the Connection Expert, the NI MAX tool, and any other M9018A program
(such as Soft Front Panel) prior to running the Configurator program.
75
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
The following procedure assumes that the chassis is currently operating with
the 1x8 configuration and that the PCIe link configuration is being changed
from 1x8 to 2x8. It is further assumed that you have a system module other than
the M9021A in use or ready to install in the system controller slot—for example,
the Keysight M9036A embedded controller.
After the PCIe link configuration is changed from 1x8 to 2x8, host controllers
using the M9021A will no longer be able to properly communicate to the
chassis through an M9021A PCIe Cable Interface module. Only perform the
procedure in this section if you have a module that supports 2x8 ready to install
in slot 1.
If, while performing this procedure, communications is lost with the chassis and
cannot be re-established through your 2x8 module, you can restore the default
1x8 configuration by performing the procedure described in “Preemptively
restoring the factory default 1x8 Base Configuration” on page 87.
Before describing how to use the Configurator to change from 1x8 to 2x8, let’s
look at the timing of the change as shown in Figure 40. The time line repeats the
first-ever PCIe Reset from Figure 39 (which loads 1x8 into the PCIe Switch
Fabric), and then adds use of the Configurator to change the configuration to
2x8.
Chassis power
(High = powered on)
PC rebooted or restarted,
which generates the
PCI Reset
PCIe
R
signal.
i l
PCIe Reset from
the host PC
(Low = reset)
PCIe Switch Fabric
Assume this is the chassis’
first-ever PCIe Reset signal
U d fi d until
Undefined
til a
PCIe Reset occurs
Because this is the first-ever PCIe
Reset, the virtual switch is in the Base
Configuration: 1x8 position. This loads
the 1x8 configuration into the PCIe
Switch Fabric.
Figure 40
1x8
1x8
Assume that the Configurator program is
usedd hhere tto sett the
th User
U Configuration
C fi
ti
to 2x8. This also moves the virtual switch
to the User position. However, the PCIe
Switch Fabric that is currently in use
doesn’t change until the next PCIe Reset
occurs; therefore, the PCIe Switch Fabric
remains 1x8 for now.
2x8
With this PCIe Reset,
the previously-set 2x8
configuration is loaded
into the PCIe Switch
Fabric.
Using the Configurator program to set the 2x8 configuration
The time line shows use of the Configurator to set the User Configuration to 2x8.
When 2x8 is selected, the Configurator program moves the virtual switch to the
User Position.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
76
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
However, the PCIe Switch Fabric doesn’t change from 1x8 to 2x8 until the next
PCIe Reset occurs. PCIe Reset occurs when the host PC is either rebooted or
restarted. Until a PCIe Reset occurs, the PCIe Switch Fabric will remain 1x8, and
normal communications with the chassis can continue.
The fact that the PCIe Switch Fabric doesn’t change until a PCIe Reset occurs
provides the option shown in Figure 41. Between the period when the Configurator
is used to select the next configuration (2x8, in this case) and when the PCIe
Reset occurs, it is possible to use the Configurator again to re-select the original
configuration (1x8, in this case). Then, when PCIe Reset occurs, the PCIe Switch
Fabric will remain 1x8. This is useful in case you realize, for example, that your
slot 1 system controller card is not compatible with the PCIe link configuration
that you’ve just selected.
PC rebooted or restarted,,
which generates the
PCIe Reset signal.
PCIe Reset from
the host PC
(Low = reset)
PCIe Switch Fabric
1x8
Assume that the Configurator
program is used here to set the
User Configuration to 2x8.
However, the PCIe Switch Fabric
that is currently in use won’t
change
h
until
til th
the nextt PCI
PCIe Reset
R t
occurs; therefore, the PCIe
Switch Fabric will remain 1x8 for
now.
1x8
1x8
1x8
Assume that you realize here that you want to retain
the 1x8 configuration. You can use the Configurator
to re-program the User Configuration to 1x8, which
will replace the pending 2x8 configuration.
Wh you bbring
When
i up th
the C
Configurator
fi
t tto make
k this
thi
change, the Configurator will report that the current
PCIe Switch Fabric is 1x8 (because the PCIe Reset
signal has yet to occur, meaning that the pending
2x8 configuration has yet to be loaded into the PCIe
Switch Fabric). However, you will still need to
program the 1x8 configuration in order to replace the
pending 2x8 configuration. If you inadvertently
conclude, based on the PCIe Switch Fabric being
p g
the 1x8
1x8, that yyou don’t need to re-program
configuration, the pending 2x8 configuration will
take affect at the next PCIe Reset signal.
With this PCIe Reset
Reset, the
most recently set User
Configuration (1x8, in this
case) will be loaded into the
PCIe Switch Fabric. Therefore,
th will
there
ill bbe no change
h
iin th
the
PCIe Switch Fabric from the
original 1x8 configuration.
Figure 41 Re-selecting the original PCIe link configuration prior to a PCIe Reset
will retain the original configuration
77
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Now let’s describe how to use the Configurator program to select the 2x8
configuration. The Configurator program is installed as part of the M9018A
software installation process described in the M9018A Startup Guide.
As described earlier, if you are using the M9021A PCIe Cable Interface module
and if you change the PCIe link configuration from 1x8 to 2x8 on older versions
of the M9018A fabrics, the host controller PC will no longer be able to
communicate to the chassis through the M9021A module. Change only to the
2x8 configuration (or the 4x4 configuration) if you have a module that supports
the target PCIe link configuration, such as the M9036A or M9037A embedded
controller.
Once the configuration process begins, it is very important that the process be
allowed to run to completion. Any interruption of the configuration process will
leave the chassis PCIe Switch Fabric in an indeterminate state, and will require
multiple power cycles of the chassis and multiple reboots of the computer to
restore operation (which will be to the 1x8 factory default PCIe Switch Fabric).
To ensure that the configuration process runs to completion, perform the
following:
1 If you are using a laptop PC, attach the AC power adapter to ensure that you
will not experience a low battery shutdown.
2 Ensure your Windows power management Sleep and Hibernate modes are
not configured to power down the host PC during the configuration process
which can take several minutes.
3 Do not turn the PC nor the chassis off while configuration of the switch fabric
is underway.
4 Do not terminate the Configurator program while it is configuring the switch
fabric.
5 Do not operate the Keysight Configuration Expert (part of IO Libraries), the NI
MAX tool, nor run any M9018A application (IVI, Soft Front Panel, etc.) while
performing a fabric update.
If the configuration process is interrupted, see “Restoring operation after an
interruption of the configuration process” on page 85 for information on how to
restore your chassis to an operating state.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
78
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
To select the 2x8 configuration, perform the following steps:
1 The Configurator utility program is available from the Windows Start button;
select All Programs > Keysight > M9018 > PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator. This
opens the dialog shown in Figure 42.
On older systems, an older version of the Configurator utility can be found in one
of the following locations, depending on your Windows operating system:
Program Files > Keysight > M9018 > bin > PCIeFabric.exe
Program Files (x86) > Keysight > M9018 > bin > PCIeFabric.exe
Figure 42
Configurator startup dialog
2 Enter your chassis PCI bus number in the Chassis PCI Bus number field. As
noted in the dialog, the chassis PCI bus number is displayed in Connection
Expert. Click Connect to Chassis... after entering the PCI bus number.
79
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Make certain that Connection Expert is closed prior to selecting
the fabric in the next step.
3 The Fabric Configurator selection dialog is displayed next as shown in Figure 43.
To change to the 2x8 PCIe link configuration, use the Fabric Configuration
pull down menu to select 2-Link Configuration: 2x8, and then click Start
Reconfiguration.
Figure 43
Fabric Configuration selection dialog
Newer fabric versions that are available on newer driver versions
of the M9018A software installations have appended “[Rev.<n>]”
to indicate the version number of that fabric.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
80
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
While the reconfiguration is in progress, the progress indicator shown in
Figure 44 will be displayed. It is very important that the Configurator program not
be terminated or otherwise interrupted during the reconfiguration.
Figure 44
Configurator progress indicator
If the reconfiguration successfully completes, the Configurator displays the
dialog shown in Figure 45.
81
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
Figure 45
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Dialog if reconfiguration is successful
At this point, the virtual switch shown in Figure 38 on page 71 is in the User
position and the User Configuration has been set to 2x8. However, the 2x8
configuration has not yet been loaded into the PCIe Switch Fabric. As noted
above, you must reboot your computer in order for the 2x8 configuration to
become active, as shown in Figure 40 on page 76. It is not necessary to power
cycle the chassis.
If the reconfiguration is not successful, the Configurator will present you with
several options as described in “Reconfiguration failure” on page 84.
ASIDE: Self test operation, which is described in the next chapter, will detect the
post-configuration need to reboot your computer, and will generate the
following error message if self test is run at this point. This is basically a
restatement of the need shown in Figure 40 on page 76 to reboot your computer
in order to load the just-selected PCIe Switch Fabric.
Figure 46 If self test is run prior to rebooting your computer, it will detect that
the computer needs to be rebooted
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
82
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
The 2x8 PCIe link configuration that has been installed will persist across a
chassis power cycle as shown in Figure 47. However, as usual, the PCIe Switch
Fabric will be undefined until a PCIe Reset occurs.
Figure 47
Persistence of the PCIe link configuration across a power cycle
Configuring the chassis to run at Gen 1 speeds
At times it may be necessary to run the Keysight M9018A chassis at Gen 1
speeds (also known as Safe Mode as the bit error rate of a questionable PCIe
connection goes down with the slower data rate of Gen 1). To do this you must
run the PCIe Fabric Configurator program:
1 The Configurator utility program is available from the Windows Start button;
select All Programs > Keysight > M9018 > PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator.
2 Follow the instructions to enter the chassis bus number. (See also Figure 42)
3 In the fabric configurator drop down box, select:
2-link Configuration 1x8 [Limited to PCIe Gen1 Speed]
(see Figure 48)
4 Press the Start Reconfiguration button.
5 Allow the configuration process to complete. Follow all instructions on the
display.
6 Cycle the chassis power.
83
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Select this
option for
Gen 1
Figure 48 PCI Configurator for Gen1 speeds
Reconfiguration failure
If the reconfiguration fails for any reason, the Configurator displays the dialog
shown in Figure 49.
Figure 49
Dialog displayed if the reconfiguration fails
Click Retry to attempt to program the previously-selected switch fabric. Click
Ignore if, instead of attempting to program the previously-selected configuration,
you want to restore the 1x8 factory default configuration. Both of these
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
84
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
operations will bring up the Configurator progress indicator shown in Figure 44 on
page 81. If reconfiguration is successful, the selected configuration will become
active after the next boot.
Clicking Abort terminates all attempts to program a configuration, displays the
dialog shown in Figure 50 and the chassis defaults back to 1x8, which becomes
active after the next boot. If self test is run following the boot, code 537 and
message “Error detected during PCIe Switch Fabric configuration.
Base (factory default) PCIe Switch Fabric was re-selected.” will
be returned. This code/message indicates that the initial reconfiguration failed,
and that the 1x8 Base Configuration was automatically re-selected. Once the
default fabric has been restored, you may attempt to reconfigure the fabric again.
If you continue to get the failure message, contact Keysight support.
Figure 50
Dialog displayed after selecting Abort
Restoring operation after an interruption of the configuration process
This section lists the steps that are needed if the configuration process is
interrupted—for example, if the chassis is powered down during the configuration
process. These steps are based on using Keysight IO Libraries Suite 16.1 (or
later), and will restore the PCIe Switch Fabric to the 1x8 factory default
configuration.
85
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Using the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
An important aspect of programming the PCIe Switch Fabric is that, as the fabric
is being programmed, the virtual switch shown in Figure 38 on page 71 is set to
point to the 1x8 Base Configuration. If programming of the fabric (for example, to
the 2x8 configuration) is successful, the virtual switch is then set to the Base
Configuration, which contains the 2x8 fabric. When the PC is booted next, the
2x8 Base Configuration will be loaded into the PCIe Switch Fabric as shown in
Figure 40 on page 76.
If programming of the 2x8 (or 4x4) configuration is interrupted, the fabric being
stored in the Base Configuration will likely be incomplete. However, the virtual
switch is set to the 1x8 Base Configuration during the programming (and
therefore remains set there after the interruption) will allow the 1x8 configuration
to be loaded at the next PC boot. When the chassis driver communicates to the
chassis after the boot (for example, when the SFP is brought up), the driver will
detect that the PCIe programming was interrupted, and will perform several
additional steps to instantiate 1x8 as the current chassis configuration.
The following steps to restore 1x8 assume a remote controller PC, not an
embedded controller. If you have an embedded controller, steps 1-4 can be
combined into these steps: Power down your chassis, wait one second, and
power up your chassis.
1 Shut down your PC.
2 Power down your chassis and wait one second.
3 Power up your chassis and wait three seconds.
4 Turn on your PC.
5 After Windows is up, start Connection Expert, and verify that the chassis is
displayed. If Connection Expert isn’t able to display the chassis, you will need
to perform the recovery operation described in “Preemptively restoring the
factory default 1x8 Base Configuration” on page 87.
6 Start the chassis SFP by clicking the Connection Expert Start SFP button. This
allows the chassis driver to perform the steps necessary to instantiate 1x8 as
the current chassis configuration.
7 From the SFP and for informational purposes, perform a chassis self test. Self
test should display codes 506 and 537 (and possibly error code 509). For the
messages associated with these codes, see “Self test codes and messages”
on page 95.
8 Restart your PC.
9 Start the SFP, rerun self test, and verify that codes 506 and 507 are not
reported.
At this point, the PCIe Switch Fabric will be the 1x8 configuration. If desired, the
Configurator program can be run again to select another configuration.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
86
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base Configuration
Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base Configuration
Assume that your PCIe Switch Fabric is currently set to a 2x8, and that you have
an embedded controller that is using the 2x8 configuration. Assume furthermore
that you want to reconfigure the chassis to work with the M9021A Cable
Interface module. In this case, you would run the Configurator on the embedded
controller to select the 1x8 configuration.
If, for any reason, you are not able to run the Configurator program on the
embedded controller in order to select 1x8, the chassis allows you to
preemptively restore the 1x8 Base Configuration. The preemptive restoration
requires pressing a pushbutton internal to the chassis while, at the same time,
restarting the host controller PC to generate the PCIe Reset signal.
For an embedded controller PC, it is typically straightforward to restart the PC
while simultaneously pressing the chassis internal pushbutton because you’re
only interacting with one device, the chassis. For a remote controller PC that may
be several feet from the chassis, the task of restarting the PC while
simultaneously pressing the chassis internal pushbutton may be best
accomplished with an assistant.
Restoring the chassis PCIe switch fabric to its factory default
configuration requires pressing a pushbutton internal to the chassis
while the chassis is powered up. Only qualified, service-trained
personnel shall be allowed to remove the instrument cover and actuate
the pushbutton while the instrument is energized. High current and
high energy source connectors are proximate to the pushbutton which
could cause potential burns if short circuited.
To restore the Base Configuration, perform the following steps:
1 Turn the chassis off and unplug the chassis from AC power.
2 Remove the chassis top cover as follows:
a Remove the two rear feet of the chassis by using a Torx T8 screwdriver.
Each of the two rear feet has two Torx screws.
b Next, remove the 14 screws holding the top cover in place using a #2
Phillips screwdriver. There are 5 screws on each side of the cover, two on
top of the cover near the front panel, and two in the back of the chassis
that screw into the chassis rear panel.
c After the screws are removed, lift up the rear of the chassis cover about 12
mm (.5 inches) and slide the cover back off of the chassis. Place the cover
in a location away from the chassis.
87
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base Configuration
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
3 Identify the Load Base Configuration Pushbutton at the top of the backplane
behind the three-wide expansion slot to the left of slot 1—see Figure 51.
Figure 51
Load Base Configuration Pushbutton
4 If you have an embedded controller, perform the following steps (for an external
controller, proceed to step 5):
a Re-connect the chassis power cord to AC power.
b Press and hold the Load Base Configuration Pushbutton before powering
up the chassis.
In the next step, you’ll power up the chassis. In doing so, ensure that no
contact is made with anything in the chassis other than the pushbutton.
Ensure that no metallic object, such as a ring or a watchband, contacts
any chassis components.
c Power up the chassis while continuing to press the pushbutton. As the
embedded controller powers up, the PCIe Reset signal is generated.
d After the embedded controller has restarted as indicated by the Windows
splash screen appearing, release the Load Base Configuration Pushbutton.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
88
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base Configuration
At this point, the Base Configuration (1x8) has been loaded into the PCIe
Switch Fabric.
e Continue onto step 6.
5 If you have an external (remote) controller PC, perform the following steps:
In the next step, you’ll power up the chassis. In doing so, ensure that no
contact is made with anything in the chassis other than the pushbutton.
Ensure that no metallic object, such as a ring or a watchband, contacts
any chassis components.
a Re-connect the chassis power cord to AC power and power up the
chassis.
b Press the Load Base Configuration Pushbutton and then, while continuing
to press the pushbutton, restart the remote controller PC. As noted earlier,
this may be best accomplished with an assistant.
c After the remote controller PC has restarted as indicated by the Windows
splash screen appearing, release the Load Base Configuration Pushbutton.
At this point, the Base Configuration (1x8) has been loaded into the PCIe
Switch Fabric.
6 While the Base Configuration: 1x8 has now been loaded into the PCIe Switch
Fabric, the virtual switch is still set to the 2x8 position—use of the pushbutton
doesn’t affect the position of the virtual switch. In order to re-position the
switch to the Base position, chassis software needs to be run. This is most
easily accomplished by bringing up the SFP. In running the SFP, the IVI driver
used by the SFP will detect that the Load Base Configuration Pushbutton has
been used, and will reposition the virtual switch to the Base Configuration
position. The PCIe Link Configuration display on the SFP Monitor tab will now
show “2-Link Configuration: 1x8 (Factory Default]”.
7 Power down the chassis and unplug the chassis from AC power.
8 Re-install the chassis top cover by performing steps a-c (in step 2) in reverse
order, ensuring that all screws are reinserted.
9
Re-connect the power cord to AC power and perform the power sequence
described in Chapter 4, “Chassis and Host Controller Power Up/Down
Sequence”.
52 on page 90 shows the complete time line for preemptively restoring the
factory default 1x8 Base Configuration.
89
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Figure 52
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
2x8
1x8
Note that this does not affect the
position of the virtual switch – it remains
pointing to where it was, usually to the
User Configuration because that typically
contains the most recently selected
(2x8,
g
( , in this case).
)
configuration
Bringg upp Keysight
Connection Expert.
This ensures that the
SFP (used next) has a
correct view of the
cchassis
ass s configuration.
co gu a o
Release the pushbutton
when the Windows
splash screen appears.
When the PCIe Reset signal occurs while
the
Base C
Configuration
Pushbutton
h LLoadd B
fi
i P
hb
is pressed, the 1x8 Base Configuration is
loaded into the PCIe Switch Fabric.
Undefined until a PCIe
Reset occurs
Press and hold the pushbutton,
then reboot or restart the PC – this
ill generate
t th
i l
will
the PCI
PCIe R
Resett signal.
Pressing the pushbutton
sets the Pushbutton Latch
Assume that the PCIe Switch Fabric is currently
set to 2x8, but that you are unable to run the
Configurator program in order to select 1x8 – for
example, due to a mismatch between the 2x8
g
and the cable card in slot 1 of the
configuration
chassis. This procedure will allow you to return
the chassis to the factory-default configuration,
which is the 1x8 configuration.
PCIe Switch Fabric
PCIe Reset from
the host PC
(Low = reset)
Load Base Configuration
Pushbutton
(Low = pressed)
Pushbutton Latch
(internal to chassis,
not customer viewable)
PC Power
(High = powered on)
Chassis power
(High = powered on)
With the chassis powered off
off, remove the
chassis cover as described in this section.
1x8
Note that the IVI-COM driver has no
way to clear the Pushbutton Latch;
hence a chassis power cycle is
hence,
required to clear it.
1x8
With this PCIe Reset, the
chassis will reload the 1x8 Base
Configuration because the
virtual switch position has been
moved by the IVI-COM driver to
ase Configuration
Co gu a o pos
position.
o
thee Base
While the chassis is
powered off, re-install
the chassis cover.
Bring upp the M9018A Soft Front
Panel. The IVI-COM driver used by
the SFP will detect (via the
Pushbutton Latch) that the Load
Base Configuration Pushbutton has
ee pushed,
pus e , and
a will perform
pe o
been
activities such as moving the
virtual switch to point to the Base
Configuration. This will ensure that
the chassis will load the 1x8 Base
Configuration during future PCIe
Reset events.
Turn
T
rn off the PC
PC, then tturn
rn
on the chassis to clear
the Pushbutton Latch.
Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base Configuration
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
Time line for preemptive restoration of 1x8
90
Changing and Restoring the PCIe Link Configuration
91
Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base Configuration
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
15
Performing a Chassis Self Test
This chapter describes how to perform a chassis self test, and lists the codes and
messages generated by self test. For detailed information on the self test
messages and how to use the self test results to troubleshoot issues with the
chassis, see Chapter 21, “Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results”.
Self test can be initiated from the SFP or programmatically using the IVI or
LabVIEW drivers. Figure 53 shows how to initiate self test from the M9018A soft
front panel. Note that the Allow Control check box must be checked in order to
perform a self test.
Figure 53
Initiating self test from the SFP
Figure 54 on page 94 shows the SFP implementation of self test. This diagram
shows that a limited set of self tests are performed whenever any program,
including the SFP, performs the first initialization call to the chassis. Any self test
results from the first initialization call are then merged with any self test results
generated when the full self test is executed.
IVI users are alerted to first initialization self test failures by the error codes:
IVI-COM: E_AGM9018_SELF_TEST_RECOMMENDED
IVI-C: AGM9018_ERROR_SELF_TEST_RECOMMENDED
The programmatic execution of self test is performed in a similar manner to the
SFP implementation of self test. In fact, the process by which the SFP reads the
self test results (green box in Figure 54 on page 94) is the same process that
would be followed by an application program.
92
Performing a Chassis Self Test
Performing self test using the IVI drivers
Performing self test using the IVI drivers
Refer to the IVI help system for information on performing self test
programmatically. As noted above, executing self test programmatically is very
similar to the SFP implementation of self test.
93
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A Chassis Self Test Using the SFP
It is recommended that the user
program request a full self test if this
error code is returned by the
initialization. This SFP will display
the dialog below in response to this
error code to recommend that the
full self test be run.
The first call that any application,
including the SFP, must make in
order to interface to the chassis is an
initialization call.
1. SFP actions are shown above the blue timeline, chassis actions are shown
below the timeline.
2. This diagram assumes that two self test errors occur during the chassis
initialization process (represented by yellow rectangles) and that three self test
errors occur during the full self test (salmon rectangles).
Initialization self tests include “INIT” in the results string.
SFP indicates that self test
passed if the error count is 0
OPTIONAL: The user can start the
process to run a full self test using the
SFP menu below. Note that this requires
that Allow Control be checked.
SFP displays each self test
error code and message
E_AGM9018_SELF_TEST_RECOMMENDED
The initialization process was successful
but there were self test errors.
Y
Error
count
=0?
Other possible return
values aren’t shown.
Display of error
codes/messages done
Internal SFP operation
Y
N
N
Error
count
=0?
Chassis
power on
SFP performs an
initialization call
to the chassis
Return results
of initialization
to the SFP
Is this the
first initialization
call to the chassis
by any program
?
N
SFP performs a call to
initiate a “full self test”
Did
initialization
self test
pass?
N
SFP queries
first (or next)
error code and
message from
queue below
Chassis returns
error code and
message
SFP queries the
self test error
count
Y
The self test error count is the number of error
codes in the self test error queue. For the first
initialization by any process, the self test error
count will reflect initialization self test failures, if
any, plus full self test errors, if any. In this
example, the self test error count is 5.
Chassis returns
error count
The self test error count is
decremented by one each time an
error code/message is queried
(read) from the self test queue.
Chassis
performs a
full self test
The chassis will merge
the queue of initialization
self test error codes/
messages with any full
self test error codes/
messages.
Initialization self test
error codes/messages
Full self test error
codes/messages
Queue of self test results,
error count = 5
I
After the first initialization by any process, any
self tests run will only report full self test errors
(if any errors occur).
Note that full self test error codes/messages can
repeat initialization self test error codes/messages.
E_AGM9018_SELF_TEST_RECOMMENDED
This message indicates the initialization
process was successful, but there were
self test errors.
Queue of Initialization self test
error codes/messages
(2, in this example)
The above merge of the initialization self test queue with the full self
test queue occurs only for the first self test that is requested by any
process. The first self test request can be from a different process
than the process that performed the first initialization call that
triggered execution of the initialization self tests.
Figure 54
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
Chassis returns
error count
Queue of full self test
error codes/messages,
if any (3, in this example)
Y
Perform the
“initialization self test”
SFP queries the
self test error
count
Internal chassis driver operation
Chassis Self Test using the Soft Front Panel
94
Self test codes and messages
Self test codes and messages
The self test codes and messages are listed below. The messages are grouped
into low numbered codes (starting at 1) and high numbered codes (starting at
500). Low-numbered codes generally indicate a situation where service is
required. High-numbered codes indicate situations that you can often resolve
yourself. For details on these groups, the meaning of each message and possible
actions to take in response to the messages, see Chapter 16, “Troubleshooting
the M9018A System”.
Low-numbered self test codes (service typically is required)
1,”Chassis Monitor processor is not responsive.”
2, unused
3,”Unable to operate IO channel that allows PCIe Switch Fabric reconfiguration.”
4,”Unable to operate IO channel to PXI Trigger routing buffers.”
5,”Unable to operate IO channel to chassis EPROM.”
6,”Error writing to the chassis EPROM. Reinstall chassis PCIe Switch Fabric.”
7,”One or more chassis fans operating outside valid RPM range.”
8,”Chassis fan 1 operating outside valid RPM range.”
9,”Chassis fan 2 operating outside valid RPM range.”
10,”Chassis fan 3 operating outside valid RPM range.”
11,”Chassis fan speed selector switch is in HIGH position, but one or more fans
not operating at maximum speed.”
12,”Chassis fans are operating at dissimilar speeds.”
13,”Chassis fan AUTO speed control is not functioning properly.”
14,”IO failure during self test. If problem persists, contact Keysight Technical
Support.”
15, unused
16, unused
17,”Reading from non-volatile chassis memory failed.”
18,”Corrupt serial number in non-volatile memory.”
19,”Chassis self-test cache memory inaccessible.”
20,”Failed to recover to the Base (factory default) PCIe Switch Fabric during
initialization.”
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
95
High numbered self test codes (situation may be customer resolvable)
500,”Chassis Manager operating on backup (read-only) firmware image. See
Keysight Technical Support.”
501,”Chassis Manager firmware was updated since power-up. Power cycle the
chassis and reboot system
controller.”
502,”Chassis memory structure corrupted. Run IVI driver (or SFP utility) Reset
command, and then rerun self test to validate.”
503,”Previous reset operation found chassis memory structure corrupted, chassis
memory was re-initialized.”
504,”PCI Configuration Space Header corrupted. Power cycle the chassis and
reboot the system controller.”
505,”Unable to operate IO channel to Chassis Manager. Check PCIe connection.”
506,”New PCIe Switch Fabric has been selected, but not loaded. Reboot the
system controller to load the new fabric.”
507,”Previous PCIe Switch Fabric update failed. Restoring Base (factory default)
PCIe Switch Fabric.”
508,”PCIe Switch Fabric currently in use is of a type that is not recognized by this
version of chassis driver software. Consider updating your chassis driver
software to a newer version.”
509,”Chassis EPROM checksum failure. Reinstall PCIe Switch Fabric.”
510,”Chassis EPROM does not match currently installed PCIe Switch Fabric.
Reinstall PCIe Switch Fabric.”
511, unused
512,”Non-volatile memory failure during PCIe Switch Fabric install/repair
operations. Reinstall PCIe Switch Fabric.”
513,”Chassis driver's built-in PCIe Switch Fabric cache has an older fabric revision
than the PCIe Switch Fabric currently in use. Consider updating your chassis
driver software to a newer version.”
514,”Chassis driver's built-in PCIe Switch Fabric cache has newer fabric than the
PCIe Switch Fabric currently in use. Consider updating your chassis to your
driver's newer fabric.”
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
96
515,”PCIe Switch Fabric chip loaded with wrong image for that chip. Reinstall PCIe
Switch Fabric.”
516,”PCIe switch fabric chips loaded with mismatching Type code. Reinstall PCIe
switch Fabric.”
517,”PCIe switch fabric chips loaded with mismatching Revision code. Reinstall
PCIe Switch Fabric.”
518,”PCIe switch fabric chips loaded with unexpected Revision. Reinstall PCIe
Switch Fabric.”
519,”One or more chassis temperatures operating outside valid range.”
520,”Chassis temperature sensor 1 operating outside valid range.”
521,”Chassis temperature sensor 2 operating outside valid range.”
522,”Chassis temperature sensor 3 operating outside valid range.”
523,”Chassis temperature sensor 4 operating outside valid range.”
524,”Chassis temperature sensor 5 operating outside valid range.”
525,”Chassis temperature sensor 6 operating outside valid range.”
526,”Chassis temperature sensor 7 operating outside valid range.”
527,”Chassis temperature sensor 8 operating outside valid range.”
528,”One or more voltage rails operating outside valid range.”
529,”3.3V voltage rail operating outside valid range.”
530,”5V voltage rail operating outside valid range.”
531,”-12V voltage rail operating outside valid range.”
532,”+12V voltage rail operating outside valid range.”
533,”5V auxiliary voltage supply operating outside valid range.”
534,”Non-volatile self test memory cache size is invalid. Cache repaired, please
rerun self test to validate repair.”
535,”Non-volatile self test memory cache checksum failure. Cache repaired,
please rerun self test to validate repair.”
536,”Non-volatile self test memory problem required re-initializing the memory.”
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
97
Self test codes and messages
537,”Error detected during PCIe Switch Fabric configuration. Base (factory
default) PCIe Switch Fabric was re-selected.”
538,”Load Base Configuration Pushbutton press was latched. Power cycle
chassis to clear latch, and then reboot the system controller.”
539,”Currently loaded PCIe Switch Fabric has no revision information”
98
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
16
Troubleshooting the M9018A
System
This chapter describes how to troubleshoot the M9018A system, where M9018A
system refers to the complete hardware/software system shown in Figure 55. The
system may include a laptop PC, a desktop PC, a rack-mounted PC, or an
embedded controller. This chapter does not describe how to troubleshoot
modules in the chassis other than the module installed in slot 1, the system
controller slot. For information on troubleshooting other modules, please see
your module documentation.
Keysight Connection Expert
PCIe
ExpressCard
Adapter (x1)
PCIe
Cable
Interface (x8)
Soft Front Panel
(SFP)
PCIe
Desktop
Ad
t ((x8)
8)
Adapter
Embedded
computer
Figure 55
M9018A system
The troubleshooting process focuses on investigating and resolving exceptions
to normal system operation. An exception may be as benign as a chassis
temperature alarm caused by a mis-set temperature threshold, or as impacting
as a failed hardware component such as the chassis power supply. The goal of
this guide is to provide sufficient information for you to resolve system
exceptions and return the chassis system to normal operation.
If you’re troubleshooting the M9018A system, Keysight recommends checking if
there is a later version of this guide available at
www.keysight.com/find/M9018A.
The six types of exceptions covered in this guide are shown in
Figure 56. Comments and examples are provided for each type of exception.
99
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
System
Exceptions
E
Exception
ti #1
Chassis doesn’t
power up
E
Exception
ti #2
Abnormal fan
behavior
All LEDs remain off
when attempting to
power up the
chassis
Exception
E
ti #3
Abnormal front
panel LEDs
One or more
fans are not
rotating.
One or more voltages
are missing or
incorrect on the rear
panel DB-9 connector
One or more fans
are rotating
under-speed.
Figure 56
EException
ti #4
Chassis
alarm(s) set
LEDs are illuminated
but indicate a problem
Flashing at 1 Hz due to
voltages temperatures,
voltages,
temperatures
or fan speeds exceeding
thresholds
Slow flashingg ((10
seconds on, 1 second
off) if Monitor Processor
can’t communicate to
Chassis Manager
Exception
E
ti #5
Exception
E
ti #6
Self test
Host controller PC
completes with can’t communicate
messages
to the chassis
Alarms can be set
T i ll characterized
Typically
h
i d
to occur on
by the chassis not
temperatures, fan
appearing in Keysight
speeds, and power
Connection Expert
supply
pp y voltages,
g as
well as changes in
Self test normally completes
the 10 MHz
without messages. Messages,
reference clock.
either informational or faultrelated, are an exception.
The six types of system exceptions
In some cases, an exception will be based on a failure in the system—for example, a failure of one of the
chassis fans. In other cases, an exception will be generated based on a fault that the user can correct
through reconfiguring the chassis. For example, if too many high-powered modules are installed in the
chassis, this can cause a current overload shutdown of the power supply. This type of fault can be resolved
by reconfiguring the chassis to have fewer high-powered modules.
100
Troubleshooting the M9018A System
An exception doesn’t necessarily indicate a failure. For example, assume that a chassis application uses an
external 10 MHz clock, and assume further that the user wants to be notified if the external 10 MHz clock
is no longer available—this is the user’s definition of an exception for this application. The user could
enable the alarm that reports if the source of the 10 MHz clock changes. Based on the occurrence of this
particular alarm, the user could then take steps to restore the external 10 MHz clock.
Overarching objective
Troubleshooting the M9018A System
There is overlap between certain exceptions. For example, a temperature sensor
that is over the temperature threshold will cause the front panel temperature LED
to flash, and will also cause the corresponding SFP temperature alarm to be set
(if that alarm is enabled). Resolving the underlying issue will eliminate both types
of exceptions.
The Exception #6: Host controller PC can’t communicate to the chassis is perhaps the
most complex of the exceptions to troubleshoot. The cause of this exception can
range from issues with the PC’s software to issues with the PC’s PCIe adapter
card to issues with the chassis itself. Considerable troubleshooting guidance is
provided for this exception category.
Overarching objective
The overarching troubleshooting objective of this guide is to allow you to
quickly and efficiently take steps to resolve system exceptions. The steps can
vary depending on the exception, and include actions such as changing a
voltage alarm threshold, changing the configuration of modules in the chassis,
replacing a failed component, or returning the chassis to Keysight for service.
To provide you with the most flexibility to resolve failures yourself, Keysight
provides two orderable chassis replacement parts, the power supply and the
fan assembly. This guide describes how to determine if either of these
components has failed, and provides the repair procedures for both.
Quick troubleshooting tips
Before going into detail on responding to exceptions, listed below are a
number of troubleshooting suggestions that may help you restore system
operation without needing to perform the more detailed troubleshooting
procedures in this guide.
- Keysight recommends installing the latest chassis software on the host
controller PC because issues from earlier software versions may be addressed.
The latest IO Libraries Suite can be found by starting at
www.keysight.com/find/iosuite, and then clicking the link Download Latest
Release. The latest chassis drivers can be found by starting at
www.keysight.com/find/pxi-chassis, and then clicking Technical Support >
Drivers & Software.
- Check to see if there is an update to the Chassis Manager firmware as
described in “Chassis firmware revision checking and installation” on page 34.
- Check also to see if there are any service notes related to the M9018A chassis
or any accessories that you are using. Go to
www.keysight.com/find/servicenotes, then enter the product number you’re
interested in, such as “M9018” or “M9021”.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
101
Troubleshooting the M9018A System
Troubleshooting tools
- If you’re using the M9021A Cable Interface module and the chassis isn’t
turning on in response to pushing the front panel ON/Standby pushbutton,
make sure the rear panel INHIBIT switch is set to the DEF (default)
position—this allows the ON/Standby pushbutton to control the chassis
power supply.
- Likewise, if you’re using the Inhibit signal on the rear panel INHIBIT/VOLTAGE
MON DB-9 connector and the chassis isn’t turning on in response to a logic
high signal, make sure the rear panel INHIBIT switch is set to the MAN (manual)
position.
Troubleshooting tools
The following items may be of assistance during the troubleshooting process:
- Spare parts—Having spare parts will allow you to use the technique known as
“parts swapping” to troubleshoot certain issues. Parts swapping is often the
most efficient and cost effective method of troubleshooting complex systems.
The next section lists several possible spare parts that you may want to have
available for troubleshooting.
- Digital mul timeter—This is useful to check the four voltage rails that are on the
rear panel DB-9 connector. The ohms scale is useful to validate chassis
ground continuity if you ever replace the power supply.
- Receptacle tester—Also known as an outlet tester, this device can be used to
verify that an outlet is powered and wired correctly. Ensure that you use a
tester appropriate for your mains AC voltage.
Spare parts
Listed below are several spare parts that you may want to acquire in case it’s
ever necessary to perform troubleshooting using the parts swapping technique.
- PCIe adapter card that plugs into the host controller PC—The two Keysight
PCIe adapter cards are the M9045 and the M9048A.
- Cable interface module that plugs into slot 1 of the chassis—The Keysight
cable interface module is the M9021A Cable Interface module.
- PCIe cable between the remote controller PC and the chassis
- Chassis power supply
- Chassis fan assembly
102
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Troubleshooting system exceptions
Troubleshooting the M9018A System
“Chassis and Accessory Model Numbers” on page 181 lists several of the above
parts as well as other parts that you may want to acquire as spare parts. The
appendix also describes how to order the chassis power supply and fan
assembly.
The power supply and the fan assembly are the only two customer-replaceable
parts in the chassis. If you are doing self-repair and conclude that your chassis
is inoperative due to a failure of a part other than the power supply or fan
assembly, the chassis will need to be returned to Keysight for service.
Troubleshooting system exceptions
This section lists the six types of system exceptions, and provides links to
chapters that provide troubleshooting recommendations for each type of
exception.
Exception #1: Chassis doesn’t power up
When the chassis is powered up, the following behavior should occur:
- The front panel LEDs should illuminate. While their exact behavior may vary
because of their reporting of chassis status (as described in Chapter 19,
“Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs”), the LEDs will typically
behave as follows:
- The Temperature (“Temp”) LED will be on for three seconds and then turn off.
- The Fan LED will be on continuously
- The Power LED will be on continuously
- The three rear panel fans will begin rotating and stay on continuously.
The lack of the LEDs illuminating (in some pattern) almost always indicates that
the chassis hasn’t powered up. If the LEDs don’t illuminate, see Chapter 17,
“Troubleshooting Failure of the Chassis to Power Up”.
Exception #2: Abnormal fan behavior
The three rear panel chassis fans should operate as follows:
- When the chassis is powered up, all three fans should rotate.
- When the rear panel FAN switch is changed from AUTO to HIGH, the fans
should switch to maximum speed. When the FAN switch is changed back to
AUTO, the fans should slow down.
If the above behavior doesn’t occur, or if the following behavior does occur, see
Chapter 18, “Troubleshooting Fan Issues”.
- The chassis front panel Fan LED is flashing.
- The SFP displays one or more fan speeds below 1200 RPM.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
103
Troubleshooting the M9018A System
Troubleshooting system exceptions
Exception #3: Abnormal behavior of the front panel LEDs
The front panel LEDs, shown in Figure 57, provide important information,
including:
- Whether the chassis is powered up
- The status of the chassis fans, temperature sensors, and power supplies
- Whether the Monitor Processor within the power supply is able to
communicate to the Chassis Manager. The Monitor Processor monitors the
chassis fans, temperature sensors, and power supplies, and directly controls
the front panel LEDs.
Power LED
Fan LED
Temperature LED
Figure 57
ON/Standby
Pushbutton
Front panel LEDs
The normal behavior of the chassis fans is for the Temperature LED to be off and
the Fan and Power LEDs to be on. Any flashing of the LEDs is considered
abnormal and an exception. Chapter 19, “Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front
Panel LEDs” describes the information communicated by flashing of the LEDs.
104
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Troubleshooting system exceptions
Troubleshooting the M9018A System
Exception #4: Chassis alarm(s) are set
The occurrence of any chassis alarm is considered an exception. This may
indicate an actual problem or a missed alarm threshold. The figure below shows
the SFP Monitor tab and the seven chassis alarms.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
105
Troubleshooting the M9018A System
Troubleshooting system exceptions
If any of the seven alarms are set, see Chapter 20, “Troubleshooting the Chassis
Alarms”.
Exception #5: Self test completes with messages
When self test is run, it should complete as shown below:
The display of any self test message(s) in the above dialog is considered an
exception and should be investigated. Some self test messages are informational
while other messages indicate a fault in the system. See Chapter 21,
“Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results” for a description of the possible
self test messages and the recommended actions.
Exception #6: Host controller PC can’t communicate to the chassis
This exception is not a specific error message or a single fault, but is a condition
where you are unable to establish communications from the host controller PC to
the chassis. The most common indicator of this exception is when the chassis is
not displayed in Connection Expert. Upon further investigation, you might
discover that the chassis is also not displayed in Windows Device Manager.
This exception can have a number of different causes, such as
- Not having the chassis drivers installed on the host controller PC
- A faulty PCIe adapter card plugged into the host controller PC
- A faulty PCIe cable
- A faulty M9021A Cable Interface module installed in the chassis
- A failure of the chassis power supply
See Chapter 22, “Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues” for a
description of the possible causes of this condition and the corrective actions.
106
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
17
Troubleshooting Failure of the
Chassis to Power Up
This section describes how to troubleshoot failure of the chassis to power up. A
failure of the chassis to power up is indicated by the three front panel LEDs not
illuminating when an attempt is made to power up the chassis. In general, there
are three reasons that the chassis might not power up:
1 The chassis power up hardware is being incorrectly activated.
2 The chassis power up hardware has failed.
3 The chassis power supply itself has failed.
Each of these possibilities is described in this chapter.
The chassis does not have a customer-replaceable fuse. Instead, the individual
power supplies (such as the 5VDC and 12VDC supplies) each have a fuse.
These fuses are not accessible nor replaceable. If the power supply fails,
including any of its fuses, it must be replaced as a complete unit.
Behavior of a powered up chassis
When the chassis is powered up, the following should occur:
1 The three front panel LEDs will illuminate for three seconds. While their exact
behavior may vary because of their reporting of chassis status (as described in
Chapter 19, “Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs”), the LEDs
will typically behave as follows:
– The Temperature (“Temp”) LED will be on for three seconds and then turn
off. If any temperature sensor is above the default temperature threshold of
65 °C (unlikely at power on), the Temperature LED will begin flashing.
– The Fan LED will be on for three seconds and then will continue on
uninterrupted if all three fans are operating above 1200 RPM. If any fan is
below 1200 RPM, the Fan LED will begin flashing.
– The Power LED will be on for three seconds and then will continue on
uninterrupted if all voltage rails are within their ±5% limits. If any voltage
rail is outside of its ±5% limits, the Power LED will begin flashing.
2 The three rear panel fans should begin rotating and stay on continuously.
This chapter focuses on the three LEDs as the primary indicator of the chassis
powering up. The rotation of the fans is used to distinguish between different
possible failures.
107
Troubleshooting Failure of the Chassis to Power Up
Power supply background information
Power supply background information
This section provides background information regarding the power supply to
assist in the troubleshooting process. First, please review Chapter 2, “Power
Supply Operation” for information on the power supply that is relevant to
troubleshooting power supply issues, including:
– “Over temperature protection” on page 14
– “Temperature derating of the primary power module” on page 15
– “Overcurrent protection of the 5V and 12V rails maximum PPM” on page 16
– “Short circuit protection of the 5V and 12V rails” on page 16
– “Short circuit protection of the 3.3V rail” on page 17
– “Monitoring of the 3.3V rail by the chassis” on page 17
– “Measuring the four main voltage rails directly” on page 18
Next, see Chapter 11, “Monitoring the Power Supply Rails” for information on
how the front panel Power LED works.
Power supply and fan architecture
Figure 58 on page 110 shows the power supply and fan architecture. The key
aspects of the power supply architecture are listed below; the fan architecture
details are described in “Fan background information” on page 115.
- The primary power module (PPM) contains two supplies that operate from AC
power, the 5VDC (5V) supply and the 12VDC (12V) supply. These supplies are
switched on by the PPM ON signal.
- The 3.3VDC (3.3V) and the –12VDC (–12V) supplies operate from the 12V
supply. If the 12V supply partially or completely fails, the 3.3V and –12V
voltage rails will be partially or completely missing.
- The four PPM voltage rails are brought out to the rear panel DB-9 connector
to allow you to measure these rails. A 1K ohm resistor is in series with each
rail to prevent accidentally shorting between rails during measurements.
- The PPM is switched on and off either by the front panel ON/Standby
pushbutton or by the Inhibit signal on the rear panel INHIBIT/VOLTAGE MON
DB-9 connector. Which mechanism is used is determined by the position of
the rear panel INHIBIT switch.
- The Monitor Processor is not involved with turning on the PPM. The Monitor
Processor monitors the PPM rails to determine when the PPM has been
turned on by the mechanism described in the above paragraph.
- The 5Vaux supply provides auxiliary (standby) power to all slots and is
powered directly from AC. When the chassis is plugged in, 5Vaux is available.
108
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Power supply background information
Troubleshooting Failure of the Chassis to Power Up
- The Monitor Processor monitors the five voltage rails shown. If the five
voltage rails are within their ±5% limits, the front panel Power LED will be on
continuously. If any rail is outside of its ±5% limit, the Power LED will flash.
The 5% limits are the default, power on limits, and can be changed using
either the SFP or programmatically.
- The front panel LEDs are powered by 3.3V. Therefore, if the 3.3V supply fails,
the LEDs will be off.
- The Monitor Processor is powered by 5Vstandby, which is connected to AC
power. When the chassis is plugged in, the Monitor Processor is active—for
example, it monitors the five rails to determine when the power supply is
turned on.
- When the Monitor Processor detects that the power supply is turned on, it
activates the fans. The fan speed is determined by the setting of the rear
panel FAN switch as described in Chapter 10, “Setting the Fan Speed vs.
Chassis Temperature Profile”.
- Activation of the fans indicates that the 5Vstandby supply is on (which powers
the Monitor Processor) and the Fan 12V supply is on.
- The Chassis Power OK signal from the Monitor Processor drives the Chassis
Power OK LED on the M9021A Cable Interface module. This signal indicates
that the 3.3V, 5V, and 12V rails are within their specifications. The –12V and
5Vaux rails are not included in the reporting by this LED.
- To power the M9021A Cable Interface module, the M9021A power slide
switch on the backplane of the chassis (and to the left of slot 1) must be slid
to the right. For all other modules inserted in this slot, including embedded
controllers, the slide switch should be positioned to the left.
Identifying the power supply version
Refer to Figure 14 on page 33 to use the Soft Front Panel (SFP) to identify the
Power Supply Hardware Revision Number.
A “1” in the Power Supply Hardware Revision Number position indicates the
new, high-power power supply.
You can also look through the fan blades on the rear of the chassis (left side) for a
label on the power supply enclosure. This label indicates the actual power supply
revision.
An “F” (or later) revision indicates the new, high-power power supply.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
109
(rear panel)
These are two different
views
i
off the
th same
connector
5V
3.3V
3
5Vaux
+12V
+
-12V
M9018A Power Supply and Fan Architecture
C20 power
connector
(rear panel)
5Vaux
Primary
y Power
Module (PPM)
To the module
slots and chassis
electronics
5V
5v
3.3V
3.3v
+12v
+12V
-12V
-12v
ON
Front panel
ON/Standby
pushbutton
12V
M9021A
power slide
switch
L
Chassis Power OK
R
Monitor Processor
Fan Monitor and Control
INHIBIT/VOLTAGE MON
(rear panel)
5Vstandby
INHIBIT
(rear panel)
Power
Supply
3.3V
Fan 12V
M9021A
Cable Interface
module
1.2V OK LED
Front panel
LEDs are
powered
by 3
3.3V
3V
Power L
LED
Tempera
ature LED
12V
Chassis Power OK LED
(indicates 3.3V, 5V,
and 12V are OK)
Fan LED
D
3.3V
Fan assembly
HIGH
DEF
(default)
ON/Standby
pushbutton
power activation
signal
MAN
(manual)
DB-9 Connector
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Logic ground
+5 VDC
Reserved
+3.3 VDC
Inhibit (active low)
+12 VDC
Reserved
-12
12 VDC
Logic ground
AUTO
ON/Standby
Pushbutton
FAN
(rear panel)
Figure 58 M9018A Chassis Power Supply and Fan architecture
Keysight M9018A PXIe Chassis User Guide
110
Troubleshooting failure of the chassis to power up
Troubleshooting failure of the chassis to power up
This section provides the troubleshooting procedure to diagnose and resolve
failure of the chassis to power up.
When you press the chassis power-on button, if the chassis does not power up
and the front panel LEDs do not light, it is possible for the chassis to be in a
safety shutdown state. Remove the chassis AC power cord from the chassis for
one minute. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the chassis again. If it still
does not power on, refer to the following troubleshooting information.
Verify AC power
The first step is to verify that AC power is connected to the chassis. The
receptacle tester described in “Troubleshooting tools” on page 102 provides a
convenient way to verify that AC power is available.
Troubleshoot the power up hardware
The next step is to troubleshoot the power up hardware. This is the circuitry that
turns on the chassis power supply. This troubleshooting step consists of: (1)
Determining if the power up hardware is being correctly activated, and (2)
determining if the power up hardware is operating correctly.
There are two means of powering up the chassis based on these positions of the
rear panel INHIBIT switch:
- DEF (Defaul t)—When the INHIBIT switch is in this position, the chassis is
powered up by the front panel ON/Standby pushbutton.
- MAN (Manual)—When the INHIBIT switch is in the position, the chassis is
powered up by the Inhibit input signal on the rear panel INHIBIT/VOLTAGE MON
DB-9 connector.
Keysight recommends leaving the INHIBIT switch in the DEF position when
connecting the AC power cord to the chassis. After inserting the power AC
power cord, then move the INHIBIT switch to the MAN position.
Ensure that the switch is set to the position consistent with your method of
powering up the chassis. If you’re using the front panel ON/Standby pushbutton,
set the switch to DEF. If you’re using the Inhibit input signal on the rear panel
INHIBIT/VOLTAGE MON DB-9 connector, set the switch to MAN.
The next two sections provide details on troubleshooting the power up hardware.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
111
Troubleshooting failure of the chassis to power up
Troubleshoot the ON/Standby pushbutton
This section applies to the situation where pushing of the
ON/Standby pushbutton doesn’t power up the chassis. As
shown in the diagram at right (which is extracted from the
“M9018A Block Diagram” on page 4), the ON/Standby
pushbutton signal travels to the system controller slot (slot
1). The module in that slot receives the pushbutton signal
and generates the output signal that turns on the power
supply.
Therefore, a module must be installed in slot 1 in order for
the pushbutton to work. The M9021A Cable Interface
module contains the necessary circuitry to process the signal
from the ON/Standby pushbutton and generate the output
signal to turn on the power supply.
If you have a M9021A module installed in slot 1, and the
chassis doesn’t power up in response to pushing the
ON/Standby pushbutton, the power up hardware on the
module may have failed. However, the M9021 module power
up hardware is relatively simple, and it is less likely than
other components (such as the power supply itself) to fail. If
you have a spare M9021A module, replace the installed
module, and see if you can now power up the chassis.
If you don’t have a spare M9021 module, try to turn on the chassis as described
in the next section. Specifically, set the INHIBIT switch to the MAN position, and
leave the Inhibit signal on the INHIBIT/VOLTAGE MON connector open circuit—this
should power up the chassis. If this doesn’t power up the chassis, continue to
“Troubleshoot the power supply” on page 113.
Troubleshoot the Inhibit input signal
If you’re using the Inhibit input signal on the rear panel INHIBIT/VOLTAGE MON DB-9
connector and if this signal doesn’t power up the chassis, check the voltage that
is being applied to the Inhibit signal. This signal is active low, meaning that a 0
VDC signal inhibits operation of the power supply (keeps it off). Therefore, a logic
high will turn on the power supply. Use a DMM to verify that the signal you’re
providing to the Inhibit input on the DB-9 connector is truly switching between
logic high and low.
Because there is an internal pullup resistor on the Inhibit signal, an open circuit
(no signal connected) on the Inhibit signal will also turn on the power supply. This
means that, if the INHIBIT switch is set to the MAN position and if no signal is
connected to the Inhibit input signal, the chassis will power up as soon as AC
power is applied. If this doesn’t occur, continue with “Troubleshoot the power
supply” on page 113.
112
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Troubleshooting failure of the chassis to power up
Remove and re-install modules
If you’re correctly applying your method of powering up the chassis but it
is still not powering up, Keysight recommends that you remove all
modules from the chassis except the system controller module in slot 1.
Removing modules is done in case a module has a short on one of its
voltage rails, or in case the total power of all of chassis modules is
causing a current overload shutdown of the power supply. If the chassis
successfully powers up after removing the modules, then perform the
steps listed below; if the chassis doesn’t power up, continue with the next
section.
1 Prior to re-installing the modules, use the Microsoft Excel power
calculator spreadsheet described in “Power calculator spreadsheet” on
page 16 to determine if the chassis is operating within its power limits.
If not, adjust your configuration accordingly.
2 Re-install the modules one module at a time and see if the power
supply problem is associated with installation of a particular module. If
so, that module might have a short on one of its voltage rails. If you
have another module of the same type, remove the potentially
problematic module, and install the replacement module, and see if
the problem recurs.
Troubleshoot the power supply
This section describes troubleshooting of the power supply, and assumes
that you have been unable to power up the chassis after performing the
preceding steps, namely:
– You have verified the presence of AC power as described in “Verify AC
power” on page 111.
– If you’re using the ON/Standby pushbutton to power up the chassis,
you have performed the steps described in “Troubleshoot the
ON/Standby pushbutton” on page 112.
– If you’re using the rear panel Inhibit signal, you have set the position of
the rear panel INHIBIT switch as described in “Troubleshoot the Inhibit
input signal” on page 112.
- You have removed all modules from the chassis except for the module
in slot 1, the system controller slot.
The power supply troubleshooting table on the next page lists possible
power supply issues, their possible causes, and suggested corrective
actions.
The power supply contains no customer-serviceable parts such as fuses. If the
power supply fails, it must be replaced as a complete unit. Replacement of the
power supply is described in Chapter 23, “Repairing the Chassis”.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
113
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Power supply troubleshooting table
The table below lists possible power supply issues, their potential causes, and recommended corrective
actions. Keysight recommends that you explore the possible causes from top-to-bottom in the table.
Power supply issue
Possible causes
Further d iagnostics, if any
Corrective action
None of the three front panel
LEDs are illuminated when you
attempt to power up the
chassis.
The 12V supply did not turn on.
The 3.3V supply, which powers
the front panel LEDs, is powered
by the 12V supply, and will
therefore also be off.
Use a DMM to read the 3.3V, 5V, and 12V
rails on the rear panel INHIBIT/VOLTAGE
MON connector.
If the 12V supply did not turn on but if the 5V
supply did turn on, this indicates that power
supply activation worked correctly but that the
12V supply has possibly failed. Replace the
power supply.
The 12V supply did turn on, but
the 3.3V supply did not turn on.
The Monitor Process is not
working, or the front panel LEDs,
the wiring to the LEDs, or the
wiring connectors have failed.
If the 12V supply did turn on, this indicates that
power supply activation worked correctly. The
fact that 3.3V supply did not come up indicates
that this supply has likely failed. Replace the
power supply.
Use a DMM to read the 3.3V, 5V, and 12V
rails on the rear panel INHIBIT/VOLTAGE
MON connector.
Also, determine if the fans are rotating.
If both 3.3V and 12V are valid, and the fans are
rotating, the power supply (which contains the
Monitor Processor) is likely OK. This is potentially
an issue with the wiring/connections to the LEDs
or the LEDs themselves. Contact Keysight
Technical Support to arrange service.
If both 3.3V and 12V are valid, and the fans are
not rotating, the power supply (which contains
the Monitor Processor) is possibly bad. Replace
the power supply.
The Power LED flashes when
the chassis is turned on.
As described in Chapter 11,
“Monitoring the Power Supply
Rails”, the Power LED will flash if
any of the five power rails are
outside of their ±5% limits.
The fact that the Power LED is flashing indicates that the chassis has powered up. However, the
flashing LED represents Exception #3: Abnormal behavior of the front panel LEDs. See
Chapter 19, “Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs” to perform further
troubleshooting.
114
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
18
Troubleshooting Fan Issues
This chapter describes how to troubleshoot the following issues with the three
fans:
- The situation where one or more fans are not rotating.
- The situation where a fan is rotating but is rotating below 1200 RPM, which is
the factory default minimum fan speed.
Because the fans receive their power from the chassis power supply, it’s possible
that a power supply failure can be interpreted as a failure of the fans. In situations
where it’s not possible to determine whether a failure is due to the power supply
or a fan, this guide will recommend replacement of the fan assembly first due to
its lower cost.
Fan background information is presented below to assist you in troubleshooting
fan issues. This information includes a description of the inter-dependencies
between the power supply and the fans. Next, a fan troubleshooting table is
presented that lists possible fan issues, their potential causes, and
recommended corrective actions.
Fan background information
This section provides information regarding the fans to assist you in the
troubleshooting process. First, please review Chapter 8, “Monitoring Fan Speeds”
for information on how the fan speed is monitored by the chassis. Next, see
Chapter 10, “Setting the Fan Speed vs. Chassis Temperature Profile” for
information on how the fan speeds can be set to operate as a function of
temperature.
Next, see “Power supply and fan architecture” on page 108 and Figure 58 on
page 110 for information on the power supply and fan architecture. The fan
information below is intended to supplement this previous information.
- The fans are powered by the Fan 12V supply. This supply is not monitored by
the Monitor Processor, nor is this voltage available on the rear panel DB-9
connector.
- The fans are controlled by the Monitor Processor. Each fan has its own driver
circuit (yellow triangle) that interfaces between the Monitor Processor and the
fan.
- The Monitor Processor reads the FAN switch and either sets the fans to
maximum speed (if the FAN switch is set to HIGH) or controls the fan speed as
a function of chassis temperature (if the FAN switch is set to AUTO).
115
Troubleshooting Fan Issues
Troubleshooting fan issues
- The fans are not directly dependent on any of the four Primary Power Module
supplies. However, the Monitor Processor will only start the fans if it detects
that at least one of the four PPM supplies is up.
- It is possible for the three front panel LEDs to all be off (which typically
indicates that the chassis is not powered up) yet the fans can still be running.
This can occur if the 3.3V supply fails. Because the front panel LEDs are driven
from 3.3V, they will all be off. However, as long as at least one (of the three)
remaining PPM supplies is up, the Monitor Processor will run the fans.
Troubleshooting fan issues
This section provides the troubleshooting procedure to diagnose and resolve
failure of the fans to rotate. As noted earlier, it is not always possible to
distinguish with certainty between a failure of the power supply and a failure of
the fan assembly. For example, if a single fan ceases to rotate, it could either be
the fan driver (in the power supply) or the fan itself. In such cases, this guide will
recommend replacement of the fan assembly first because of its lower cost.
116
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Fan troubleshooting table
Table 5
Potential fan issues
Fan issue
Possible causes
Further d iagnostics, if any
Next step
None of the three fans rotate when
the chassis is powered up.
The fuse internal to the fan 12 VDC
supply is blown.
None, neither the fan 12 VDC
supply, its fuse, nor the fan driver
circuitry are accessible for testing.
More information is needed, see the next row.
Determine if the three front panel
LEDs are off, which are controlled
by the Monitor Processor.
If the front panel LEDs are off, this is evidence
that the Monitor Processor within the power
supply has failed. Replace the power supply.
The 12 VDC fan supply or the fan
driver circuitry have failed
The Monitor Processor or the
5Vstandby power supply which
powers the Monitor Processor have
failed.
If the front panel LEDs are working, the Monitor
Processor is operational. However, because it’s
unlikely for all three fans to fail simultaneously,
the problem is still likely to be the power supply.
Replace the power supply. If that doesn’t resolve
the problem, replace the fan assembly.
The non-rotating fan(s) have failed
The front panel Fan LED is flashing.
At least one of the fans is running
below the minimum fan speed RPM
threshold. This threshold is 1200
RPM at power on, and can be
changed from 1 RPM to 10,000
RPM using the SFP or
programmatically.
The drive circuitry to the
non-rotating fan(s) has failed.
It is not possible to determine if this
issue is caused by the drive
electronics in the power supply or
the fans themselves.
Replace the fan assembly because of its lower
cost. If this doesn’t resolve the problem, replace
the power supply.
Bring up the SFP to view the fan
speeds and the minimum fan speed
alarm threshold.
Check to see if the slow fan(s) are partially
obstructed. Fix as needed.
Verify that the minimum fan speed alarm
threshold isn’t set too high, causing spurious fan
speed alarms. Fix as needed.
If a fan speed is, for example, below the default
threshold of 1200 RPM, this possibly indicates
that a fan is wearing out. Check the fan speeds
periodically, and replace the fan assembly if the
fan speed progressively slows.
117
Troubleshooting Fan Issues
One or two fans don’t rotate when the
chassis is powered up.
Troubleshooting Fan Issues
118
Troubleshooting fan issues
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
19
Troubleshooting Flashing of the
Front Panel LEDs
This chapter describes how to perform troubleshooting based on flashing of one
or more front panel LEDs shown in Figure 59. If none of the LEDs are illuminated
after attempting to power up the chassis, see Chapter 17, “Troubleshooting
Failure of the Chassis to Power Up”.
Power LED
Fan LED
Temperature LED
Figure 59
ON/Standby
Pushbutton
The three front panel LEDs
Troubleshooting flashing of the front panel LEDs means taking steps to eliminate
the cause of their flashing. These steps can take two forms: (1) Addressing the
particular parameter that is out of tolerance (for example, excessive temperature
caused by too many high powered modules), or (2) adjusting the particular
threshold that is being exceeded. Care should be taken to understand the
underlying cause of a flashing LED before adjusting its threshold to eliminate the
flashing.
There is overlap between the information conveyed by the chassis front panel
LEDs and the information conveyed by the chassis alarms. For example, the front
panel Temperature LED and the SFP temperature alarm will both indicate if the
hottest of the eight temperature sensors is above the maximum temperature
threshold that has been set.
However, there is a key difference between the front panel LEDs and the alarms.
The alarms are latched while the front panel LEDs report conditions real time (via
flashing of the LEDs). For example, if the hottest temperature sensor
momentarily exceeds the maximum temperature threshold, that will set (latch)
119
Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs
the temperature alarm (presuming the alarm is enabled). However, the
Temperature LED will only flash for the period of time that the temperature
actually exceeds the temperature threshold.
This means that it’s possible for the temperature alarm to indicate an excessive
temperature while the Temperature LED indicates the temperatures are fine.
Table 6 on page 121 lists each LED and describes under what conditions it is off,
on continuously, or flashing. “Troubleshooting abnormal LED behaviors” on
page 122 describes how to troubleshoot abnormal LED behaviors.
120
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Table 6
Behaviors of the front panel LEDs
Off
On continuously
Flashing
Power LED
(blue)
Indicates that the chassis is
turned off. This could also
indicate a failed LED, a failure
of the LED drive circuitry, or a
failure of the interconnect
wiring.
Indicates that the four main
supply voltages (3.3V, 5V, 12V,
and –12V) plus 5Vaux are
within their respective limits.
The factory default limits are
plus and minus 5% around the
nominal values.
Indicates that one or more of the supply
voltages (including the 5Vaux) are outside of
their limits, either the 5% factory default
limits or, if changed, the user-set limits.
Fan LED
(green)
Typically indicates that the
chassis is turned off. This could
also indicate a failed LED or a
failure of the LED drive
circuitry, or a failure of the
interconnect wiring.
Indicates that all three fans
are operating above 1200
RPM, the factory default limit.
Indicates that one or more of the three fans
are operating below the RPM limit, either the
1200 RPM factory- default limit or, if
changed, the user-set limit.
Temp
(Temperature)
LED (amber)
This LED is off if the chassis
temperatures are OK. To allow
you to validate that this LED is
working, the LED is turned on
for the first three seconds after
the chassis is turned on as
shown in Figure 6 on
page 22.
This LED is never on
continuously. It will either be
off if the temperatures
reported by the eight
temperature sensors are all
below the temperature limit,
or it will be flashing if one or
more of the temperature
sensors are reporting a
temperature above the limit.
Indicates that at least one of the eight
temperature sensors is reporting a
temperature above the limit, either the 65°C
factory default limit or, if changed, the
user-set limit.
Having this LED flash for a just-powered
chassis would be unexpected because the
default (power-on) temperature threshold is
sufficiently high (65 °C) that it would be
unlikely for this threshold to be exceeded at
power on.
All three LEDs on for 10
seconds and off for 1
second
This indicates that the
Monitor Processor, which
controls flashing of the
LEDs, has been unable to
communicate to the Chassis
Manager.
121
Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs
LED
Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs
Troubleshooting abnormal LED behaviors
Troubleshooting abnormal LED behaviors
The table below provides troubleshooting suggestions for abnormal LED
behaviors. This table is applicable to both troubleshooting LED behaviors
as well as troubleshooting the corresponding alarm behaviors.
Figure 60 Troubleshooting abnormal LED behavior
Abnormal Front Panel LED Behavior
Troubleshooting suggestion
All three LEDs don’t illuminate when the
ON/Standby pushbutton is pressed, or when
the rear panel Inhibit signal is used to turn on
the chassis.
This is Exception #1: Chassis doesn’t power up. See Chapter 17,
“Troubleshooting Failure of the Chassis to Power Up”.
Power LED flashes
See Chapter 11, “Monitoring the Power Supply Rails” to determine if
this is an issue with one or more voltage rails, or if this is an issue with
mis-set voltage thresholds.
If the voltage thresholds are mis-set, correct them programmatically or
using the SFP. If the voltage rails are outside of their limits, see
“Troubleshooting out-of-limits power supplies” on page 125.
Fan LED flashes
See Chapter 8, “Monitoring Fan Speeds” to determine if this is an issue
with the fan speeds, or if this is an issue with a mis-set minimum fan
speed threshold.
If the minimum fan speed threshold is mis-set, correct it programmatically
or using the SFP. If the minimum fan speed threshold is set correctly, see
Chapter 18, “Troubleshooting Fan Issues”.
Temperature LED flashes
See Chapter 9, “Monitoring the Chassis Temperature” to determine if
this is an issue with the temperature reported by one or more temperature
sensors, or if this is an issue with a mis-set maximum temperature
threshold.
If the maximum temperature threshold is mis-set, correct it
programmatically or using the SFP. If the maximum temperature threshold
is set correctly, see “Troubleshooting chassis temperatures
that are over the maximum temperature threshold” on
page 126.
All three LEDs are on for 10 seconds and then
off for 1 second.
This behavior indicates that the Monitor Processor in the power supply is
unable to communicate to the Chassis Manager. Based on circuit
complexity, the issue is more likely to be in the chassis electronics
compared to the power supply. Contact Keysight Technical Support to
arrange service of the chassis.
All three LEDs alternately blink for 1/3 Second
then chassis shuts down.
Indicates a fan behavior problem. Applies to chassis Monitor Processor
software revision number 0.38 and greater. See description below.
122
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Troubleshooting abnormal LED behaviors
Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs
All three LEDs alternately blink for 1/3 Second then chassis shuts down
Applies to chassis Monitor Processor software revision number and Power
Supply Hardware Revision number 0.59, 5 and greater. Previous software
versions did not exhibit this behavior. The Monitor Processor software revision
number can be seen in the Soft Front Panel Help > About screen:
If one or more fans is rotating below 1000 RPM the three chassis front
panel LEDs alternately flash on a 1/3 second cycle. If this condition exists
for more than one minute the chassis shuts down the Primary Power
Module (PPM) and the LEDs indicate the state of the chassis during the
last 5 seconds before shutdown. Table 7 describes the LED indicators:
Table 7
Chassis LEDs indicate show shutdown state during the last 5 seconds
LED State
POWER
Problem
TEMP
FAN
Off
Off
On
Fan control register check failed.
Off
On
Off
At least one fan is not working (<1000 RPM).
On
On
Off
Fan speed is not within +20%/-30% of control range.
On
Off
On
Fan speed does not change when the control changes by ±1.2%
On
Off
Off
MCU Code checksum error.
On
On
On
Static memory for fan speed read/write error.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
123
Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs
Troubleshooting abnormal LED behaviors
If this situation occurs
1 Unplug the AC power from the chassis (power must be removed for at
least one minute). This is necessary because neither the front panel
ON/OFF push button nor the Inhibit signal on the rear panel DB-9
connector will function if the Primary Power Module (PPM) is shut
down.
2 If modules in the chassis are hot, wait several minutes for them to cool.
3 Inspect the chassis fans to ensure there is no obstruction.
4 Reapply AC power and attempt to power-up the chassis.
5 Monitor the fans to ensure they are all rotating normally.
6 If the chassis does not power up or the behavior described above
repeats, immediately shut down the chassis and troubleshoot the
problem.
This behavior supersedes the 800 RPM minimum fan speed mentioned in
previous versions of the M9018A User and Startup Guides.
If critical systems are being operated by the chassis, you should take
precautions in your application software to monitor the M9018A fans for
operating below 1000 RPM so that any necessary shutdown operations on your
systems will be completed within the one minute period prior to the chassis's
power supply shutting down. The default fan alarm threshold (1200 RPM) may
be used to alert applications of an approaching system shutdown event.
Normal (healthy) fans never operate as low as 1200 RPM.
The fans are mounted on the chassis rear panel and exhaust air out the rear of
the chassis. The air intakes are in the front, sides and bottom of the chassis.
Ensure these are not obstructed.
Additional Troubleshooting Guidelines
- If only one or two fans are running slow or stopped, the problem is
most likely the individual fan(s). Replace the entire fan assembly.
- If all three chassis fans stop operating, the problem is most likely the
Primary Power Module (PPM) which should be replaced.
124
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Troubleshooting out-of-limits power supplies
Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs
Troubleshooting out-of-limits power supplies
The default power supply limits are ±5% except for the 3.3V rail, which
has its limits adjusted to ±10% when any application makes contact with
the chassis. If any power supply rail is outside of its limits, perform the
following steps:
1 Remove all modules from the chassis except the system controller
module in slot 1. Removing modules is done in case a module has a
short on one of its voltage rails, or in case the total power of all of
chassis modules is causing a current overload shutdown of the power
supply. If the voltage rails return to normal after removal of the
modules, continue with the next step. If the voltage rails do not return
to normal, the power supply is likely bad — replace the power supply.
2 Prior to re-installing the modules, use the Microsoft Excel power
calculator spreadsheet described in “Power calculator spreadsheet” on
page 16 to determine if the chassis is operating within its power limits.
If not, adjust your chassis configuration accordingly.
3 Next, re-install the modules one module at a time and see if the power
supply issue is associated with installation of a particular module. If so,
that module might have a short on one of its voltage rails. If you have
another module of the same type, remove the potentially problematic
module, and install the replacement module, and see if the problem
recurs. If the problem does not recur, the replaced module was likely
bad.
4 If the problem does recur with the replacement module, the problem is
possibly due to the aggregate load on the power supply. If you
concluded based on step 2 that your module configuration is operating
within the power budget of the chassis, then it’s possible that the
power supply is bad. Therefore, replace the power supply.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
125
Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs
Troubleshooting chassis temperatures that are over the maximum
Troubleshooting chassis temperatures that are over the maximum
temperature threshold
This section applies to the situation where you’ve concluded that the
maximum temperature threshold has been set correctly, but one or more
temperature sensors are reporting temperatures in excess of this
threshold. It is assumed that the excessive temperatures have plausible
values. In other words, the temperature sensors reporting the excessive
temperatures are working correctly. If you suspect that one or more
temperature sensors have failed, the chassis will need servicing by
Keysight to repair them.
Listed below are several steps that can be taken to address excessive
chassis temperatures. Additional information can be found on this topic in
Chapter 3, “Chassis Cooling and Rack Mounting”.
- Ensure that you have adequate space (50 mm minimum) in the front,
rear, and sides of the chassis for ventilation. Space below the chassis
will help also.
- If you have multiple, high-powered modules clustered in proximity to
each other, spread them out in the chassis if possible.
- Consider installing air inlet modules in the chassis to increase the
airflow.
- Ensure that all unoccupied slots are covered by filler panels.
- Verify that all three fans are rotating.
- Set the fans to operate at high speed by positioning the rear panel FAN
switch to the HIGH position.
- If you have multiple chassis mounted in a rack, place the highest
powered chassis at or near the top of the rack so that, as its heat rises,
it doesn’t heat up other chassis.
126
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
20
Troubleshooting the Chassis
Alarms
This chapter describes how to troubleshoot the chassis alarms. For information
on the chassis alarm architecture, see Chapter 7, “The Chassis Alarm
Architecture”. Alarms can be viewed and responded to programmatically or by
using the SFP. In this chapter, the SFP is used.
Troubleshooting chassis alarms means taking steps to prevent their recurrence. If
an alarm is just cleared using the SFP Clear button for that alarm but no action is
taken to correct the underlying condition that originally set the alarm, the alarm
will be immediately set again. Keysight recommends that care be taken to
understand and address the root cause of any alarm that occurs.
There is overlap between the information conveyed by the chassis front panel
LEDs and the information conveyed by the alarms. For example, the front panel
Temperature LED and the SFP temperature alarm will both indicate if the hottest
of the eight temperature sensors is above the maximum temperature threshold
that has been set. However, the SFP temperature alarm will be latched, while the
front panel Temperature LED will only flash for the period of time that the
temperature actually exceeds the temperature threshold.
For example, if the hottest temperature sensor momentarily exceeds the
maximum temperature threshold, that will set (latch) the temperature alarm
(presuming it’s enabled). The temperature alarm will remain set if the
temperature drops below the threshold. However, the Temperature LED will only
flash for the momentary period that the temperature exceeds the threshold.
This means that it’s possible for the temperature alarm to indicate an excessive
temperature while the Temperature LED indicates the temperatures are fine.
Figure 61 on page 128 shows the seven alarms supported by the chassis.
Troubleshooting the chassis alarms
Because the chassis alarms are just latched versions of the real time conditions
reported by the front panel LEDs, see “Troubleshooting abnormal LED behaviors”
on page 122 for troubleshooting information.
127
Troubleshooting the Chassis Alarms
Figure 61
128
Troubleshooting the chassis alarms
The seven alarms supported by the chassis
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
21
Troubleshooting Based on the Self
Test Results
This section provides details about each self test message and provides
suggested user actions for each message. For information on running self test,
see Chapter 15, “Performing a Chassis Self Test”. Running self test produces two
types of results:
1 Informational resul ts — For example, self test code 506, “New PCIe Switch
Fabric has been selected, but not loaded. Reboot the system controller to
load the new fabric.”, indicates that a reboot is needed to complete the
selection of a new PCIe Switch Fabric. Informational messages typically
indicate situations that can be resolved without reconfiguration or repair.
2 Faul t-related resul ts — For example, self test code 1 below,”Chassis Monitor
Processor is not responsive.”, indicates that the host controller PC was unable
to communicate with the Monitor Processor in the chassis. Fault-related
messages indicate the presence of a situation that likely requires
reconfiguration or repair.
The self test results are grouped into low-numbered codes (starting at 1) and
high-numbered codes (starting at 500). Low-numbered codes generally indicate
a situation where service is required. High-numbered codes indicate situations
that you can often resolve yourself.
In several cases, the suggested user action includes performing a system restart
(described in “Performing a system restart” on page 27). In other cases, the
suggested user action includes performing a chassis hard reset (described in
“Performing a chassis hard reset” on page 28).
129
Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results
Low-numbered codes (service is typically required)
Low-numbered codes generally indicate a situation where service is required.
However, where possible, suggested user actions are provided that may resolve
the situation.
1,”Chassis Monitor Processor is not responsive.”
The host controller PC cannot communicate to the Monitor Processor, which
provides functionality such as monitoring of fan speeds, temperature sensors,
and voltage rails. The Monitor Processor is contained within the power supply
case. Perform a chassis hard reset as described in “Performing a chassis hard
reset” on page 28, and rerun self test. If this code repeats, service is required.
If you are doing self repair, see Chapter 17, “Troubleshooting Failure of the
Chassis to Power Up”. If you are not doing self repair, contact Keysight
Technical Support.
2, unused
3,”Unable to operate IO channel that allows PCIe Switch Fabric reconfiguration.”
The host controller PC is not able to reconfigure the PCIe Switch Fabric. This
may indicate that there are other issues with the chassis as well. Service is
required, contact Keysight Technical Support. If you continue to use the
chassis, you will not be able to change the PCIe Switch Fabric.
4,”Unable to operate IO channel to PXI Trigger routing buffers.”
The host controller PC is not able to configure the PXI triggers. This may
indicate that there are other issues with the chassis as well. Service is
required, contact Keysight Technical Support. If you continue to use the
chassis, you will not be able to change the PXI triggers segment
configuration.
5,”Unable to operate IO channel to chassis EPROM.”
The host controller PC is not able to read the chassis EPROM, which contains
information such as the PCI Express topology and the chassis serial number.
Service of the chassis is recommended, contact Keysight Technical Support. If
you continue to use the chassis, it will not be PXIe compliant, which may
affect some applications.
6,”Error writing to the chassis EPROM. Reinstall chassis PCIe Switch Fabric.”
An error was detected while attempting to write to the chassis EPROM, which
is done during use of the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator program to set the
PCIe Switch fabric. Please try use of the Configurator program again, and
then rerun self test. If this code repeats, service of the chassis is required,
contact Keysight Technical Support.
7,”One or more chassis fans operating outside valid RPM range.”
8,”Chassis fan 1 operating outside valid RPM range.”
130
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results
9,”Chassis fan 2 operating outside valid RPM range.”
10,”Chassis fan 3 operating outside valid RPM range.”
This comment applies to the four self test messages above. The valid RPM
range of the fans is from 1200 to 7000 RPM. Bring up the SFP to determine if
a fan is running too slow (below 1200 RPM)—if so, check if the fan is
obstructed. If you are unable to identify a resolvable issue such as an
obstructed fan, service is required. If you are doing self repair, see Chapter 18,
“Troubleshooting Fan Issues” and Chapter 17, “Troubleshooting Failure of the
Chassis to Power Up” for guidance on possibly isolating the issue to either the
power supply or fan assembly. If you are not doing self repair, contact
Keysight Technical Support.
11,”Chassis fan speed selector switch is in HIGH position, but one or more fans not
operating at maximum speed.”
12,”Chassis fans are operating at d issimilar speeds.”
13,”Chassis fan AUTO speed control is not functioning properly.”
This comment applies to the three self test messages above. Bring up the SFP
to determine if these errors are related to a fan that is running too slow—if so,
check if the fan is obstructed. If you are unable to identify a resolvable issue
such as an obstructed fan, service is required. If you are doing self repair, see
Chapter 18, “Troubleshooting Fan Issues” and Chapter 17, “Troubleshooting
Failure of the Chassis to Power Up” for guidance on possibly isolating the
issue to either the power supply or fan assembly. If you are not doing self
repair, contact Keysight Technical Support.
14,”IO failure during sel f test. If problem persists, contact Keysight Technical Support.”
A chassis internal I/O bus error prevented the completion of self test. Perform
a system restart as described in “Performing a system restart” on page 27,
and rerun self test. If this code repeats, contact Keysight Technical Support.
15, unused
16, unused
17,”Read ing from non-volatile chassis memory failed.”
This message indicates that the host controller PC could not read chassis
non-volatile memory. Perform a system restart as described in “Performing a
system restart” on page 27, and rerun self test. If this code repeats, contact
Keysight Technical Support.
18,”Corrupt serial number in non-volatile memory.”
The chassis serial number is stored in non-volatile memory, but could not be
read. The serial number is used when performing PCIe Switch Fabric
reconfiguration operations. Install the latest chassis drivers on the host
controller PC and rerun self test. If this code repeats, contact Keysight
Technical Support.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
131
Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results
19,”Chassis sel f-test cache memory inaccessible.”
This message indicates that the host controller PC could not read chassis
non-volatile memory that stores self test codes. Perform a system restart as
described in “Performing a system restart” on page 27, and rerun self test. If
the problem persists, contact Keysight Technical Support.
20,”Failed to recover to the Base (factory defaul t) PCIe Switch Fabric during initialization.”
This error is generated when an attempt to restore the 1x8 Base (factory
default) Configuration has failed—for example, after using the Load Base
Configuration Pushbutton to try to re-establish the 1x8 Base Configuration as
described in “Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base
Configuration” on page 87. The chassis software on the host controller PC will
detect the failure and generate this error if self test is run. Perform a chassis
hard reset as described in “Performing a chassis hard reset” on page 28, and
rerun self test. If the problem persists, contact Keysight Technical Support.
High numbered self test codes (situation may be customer resolvable)
High-numbered codes indicate situations that you can often resolve yourself.
Accordingly, suggested user actions are provided that may resolve the situation.
500,”Chassis Manager operating on backup (read-only) firmware image. See Keysight
Technical Support.”
A checksum failure was detected on the Chassis Manager firmware, and the
Chassis Manager is now operating on a backup firmware image. See
Chapter 6, “Viewing the Chassis Revision and Updating Firmware”. This
chapter describes how to check if there is a chassis firmware update available
on the Keysight website. If so, follow the instructions in chapter 6 to download
and install the latest chassis firmware, even if the latest version is the same as
the version you currently have installed. If no firmware updates are available,
service is required, contact Keysight Technical Support.
501,”Chassis Manager firmware was updated since power-up. Power cycle the chassis and
reboot system controller.”
This message should only occur if you’ve updated the Chassis Manager
firmware. Perform a system restart as described in “Performing a system
restart” on page 27. Then rerun self test. If this code repeats, service is
required, contact Keysight Technical Support.
502,”Chassis memory structure corrupted. Run IVI driver (or SFP utility) Reset command,
and then rerun sel f test to validate.”
Running the Reset command should resolve this problem. If, after the Reset
command has been run, self test reports this code again, perform a system
restart as described in “Performing a system restart” on page 27. Then rerun
self test. If this code repeats, service is required, contact Keysight Technical
Support.
132
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results
503,”Previous reset operation found chassis memory structure corrupted, chassis memory
was re-initialized.”
The chassis driver has attempted to correct this problem. Therefore, no further
action should be necessary. If the problem persists, download and install the
latest chassis drivers, then rerun self test. If this code repeats, service is
required, contact Keysight Technical Support.
504,”PCI Configuration Space Header corrupted. Power cycle the chassis and reboot the
system controller.”
This self test code is unlikely to occur. Rebooting the system controller PC will
cause the BIOS to reconfigure the PCI Configuration Space Header. Rerun self
test after booting. If this code repeats, contact Keysight Technical Support.
505,”Unable to operate IO channel to Chassis Manager. Check PCIe connection.”
This message indicates that the PC initially was connected to the chassis
(sufficiently connected that self test could be initiated), and then connection
to the chassis was lost. In addition to being a chassis issue, this could also be
a PC issue or a PCIe cable issue. Check the PCIe cable connections and
perform a system restart as described in “Performing a system restart” on
page 27. Then rerun self test. If this code repeats, contact Keysight Technical
Support.
506,”New PCIe Switch Fabric has been selected, but not loaded. Reboot the system
controller to load the new fabric.”
After a new PCIe Switch Fabric is selected, rebooting of the host controller PC
is required in order to generate the PCIe Reset signal that loads the new PCIe
Switch Fabric. After the reboot, rerun self test. If this code repeats, service is
required, contact Keysight Technical Support
507,”Previous PCIe Switch Fabric update failed. Restoring Base (factory defaul t) PCIe
Switch Fabric.”
The chassis driver has detected that the previous update of the PCIe Switch
Fabric failed — for example, due to the chassis being powered down during
the fabric update process. After the computer was rebooted following the
failed attempt, and after contact was made with the chassis (for example, by
running the SFP), the driver has taken steps to restore the 1x8 Base (factory
default) PCIe Switch Fabric.
A system restart as described in “Performing a system restart” on page 27 is
required to complete the restoration. Rerun self test after performing the
system restart. If this code repeats, service is required, contact Keysight
Technical Support.
508,”PCIe Switch Fabric currently in use is of a type that is not recognized by this version
of chassis driver software. Consider updating your chassis driver software to a newer
version.”
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
133
Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results
The chassis driver does not recognize the current PCIe Switch Fabric. This
may be due to the PCIe Switch Fabric being updated while the chassis was
connected to another computer that had a later chassis driver installed.
Download and install the latest chassis drivers from Keysight’s website, and
then rerun self test. If this code repeats, service is required, contact Keysight
Technical Support. If you continue to use the chassis system as-is (without
updating your chassis drivers), you’ll receive this code again when self test is
run.
509,”Chassis EPROM checksum failure. Reinstall PCIe Switch Fabric.”
The chassis EPROM is updated whenever the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator
program is run. Therefore, rerun the Configurator program. In doing this, you
can select the same PCIe Switch Fabric that you already have. Then reboot
your PC and rerun self test. If this code repeats, service is required, contact
Keysight Technical Support.
510,”Chassis EPROM does not match currently installed PCIe Switch Fabric. Reinstall PCIe
Switch Fabric.”
This self test code is unlikely to occur. Use the Configurator program to
reinstall your switch fabric. Then reboot your PC and rerun self test. If this
code repeats, service is required, contact Keysight Technical Support.
511, unused
512,”Non-volatile memory failure during PCIe Switch Fabric install/repair operations.
Reinstall PCIe Switch Fabric.”
The above message is incorrectly assigned to this code. The message for code
512 should state: “Non-volatile memory containing the Serial Number could
not be read. You will not be able to update the fabric. Service Required”. If you
receive this code, service is required, contact Keysight Technical Support.
513,”Chassis driver's buil t-in PCIe Switch Fabric cache has an older fabric revision than
the PCIe Switch Fabric currently in use. Consider updating your chassis driver software to
a newer version.”
The chassis driver maintains copies of all PCIe Switch Fabrics. This test
indicates that the driver’s copy is an older revision than the PCIe Switch
Fabric that is currently installed in the chassis. Updating to the latest chassis
drivers should resolve this, which will update the driver’s copies of the PCIe
Switch Fabric. If you continue to use the chassis system as-is (without
updating your chassis drivers), you’ll receive this code again when self test is
run.
134
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results
Notes:
1 The driver found that your M9018 is configured with a PCIe fabric that is
newer than the version of fabric found in the M9018 software installed on
your host controller. You can make this Self Test warning go away doing
either of the following:
a. Download and install the latest M9018 driver SW from the Keysight
M9018 product web page (www.keysight.com/find/M9018A).
b. Re-configure your M9018 PCIe fabric to use the older fabric your host
controller's version of M9018 software has.
2 Changing to a newer/older version PCIe fabric can result in a change in the
PCIe Bus/Device/Function numbers for your PXI devices, which can break
existing applications that hard-code the Bus/Device/Function numbers
into the ResourceName parameter when Initializing. See VISA
documentation for resource string options that do not involve direct use of
Bus/Device/Function numbers.
3 Code 513 is a warning to the user that there is a newer driver with repairs
and/or new features they could be using.
Users may choose to ignore code 513 and continue using their existing driver
if they have no reason to change.
514,”Chassis driver's buil t-in PCIe Switch Fabric cache has newer fabric than the PCIe
Switch Fabric currently in use. Consider updating your chassis to your driver's newer
fabric.”
This is the opposite of self test code 513. In this case, the driver has a more
recent copy of the PCIe Switch Fabric than is installed in the chassis. Run the
Configurator program and specify the same PCIe configuration you already
have — this will update the PCIe Switch Fabric to the driver’s version of the
fabric. If you continue to use the chassis system as-is (without updating the
chassis PCIe Switch Fabric), you’ll receive this code again when self test is
run.
Notes:
1 The driver found that your M9018 is configured with a PCIe fabric that is
older than the version of fabric found in the M9018 software installed on
your host controller. You can make this Self Test warning go away by doing
either of the following:
a. Re-configure the PCIe fabric on your M9018 using your newer host
driver, which will allow you access to repairs and/or new features of the
newer fabric.
b. Re-install the older version of the M9018 driver SW that is coherent with
the M9018 fabric in use.
2 Changing to a newer/older version PCIe fabric can result in a change in the
PCIe Bus/Device/Function numbers for your PXI devices, which can break
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
135
Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results
existing applications that hard-code the Bus/Device/Function numbers
into the ResourceName parameter when Initializing. See VISA
documentation for resource string options that do not involve direct use of
Bus/Device/Function numbers.
3 Code 514 is a warning to the user that there is a newer PCIe fabric with
repairs and/or new features they could be using.
Users may choose to ignore code 514 and continue using their existing PCIe
fabric.
515,”PCIe Switch Fabric chip loaded with wrong image for that chip. Reinstall PCIe Switch
Fabric.”
516,”PCIe switch fabric chips loaded with mismatching Type code. Reinstall PCIe switch
Fabric.”
517,”PCIe switch fabric chips loaded with mismatching Revision code. Reinstall PCIe
Switch Fabric.”
518,”PCIe switch fabric chips loaded with unexpected Revision. Reinstall PCIe Switch
Fabric.”
This comment applies to the four self test codes/messages above. These self
test codes are unlikely to occur. Run the Configurator program and re-specify
your current configuration. Reboot your host controller PC and rerun self test.
If this code repeats, service is required, contact Keysight Technical Support. If
you continue to use the chassis system as-is (without running the
Configurator program), you’ll receive this code again when self test is run.
519,”One or more chassis temperatures operating outside valid range.”
520,”Chassis temperature sensor 1 operating outside valid range.”
521,”Chassis temperature sensor 2 operating outside valid range.”
522,”Chassis temperature sensor 3 operating outside valid range.”
523,”Chassis temperature sensor 4 operating outside valid range.”
524,”Chassis temperature sensor 5 operating outside valid range.”
525,”Chassis temperature sensor 6 operating outside valid range.”
526,”Chassis temperature sensor 7 operating outside valid range.”
527,”Chassis temperature sensor 8 operating outside valid range.”
This comment applies to the nine self test messages above. The valid
temperature range is from 0 °C to 65 °C. Temperatures outside of this range
either indicate a failed component, such as a temperature sensor, that actual
temperature conditions are outside the specified operating range of the
M9018A (0 °C to 65 °C), or the that one or more modules are running very
hot. Bring up the M9018A soft front panel to assess the situation. If, for
example, one of the temperature sensors is reporting a temperature
136
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results
significantly different than adjacent temperature sensors, that temperature
sensor is likely bad. Therefore, service is required, contact Keysight Technical
Support.
If multiple (usually contiguous) temperature sensors are reporting
temperatures above 65 °C, this is likely related to one or more modules that
are dissipating excessive heat. Check the power consumption of your modules
as described in “Power calculator spreadsheet” on page 16.
528,”One or more vol tage rails operating outside valid range.”
529,”3.3V vol tage rail operating outside valid range.”
530,”5V vol tage rail operating outside valid range.”
531,”-12V vol tage rail operating outside valid range.”
532,”+12V vol tage rail operating outside valid range.”
533,”5V auxiliary vol tage supply operating outside valid range.”
This comment applies to the six self test messages above. The valid range of
the 3.3V rail is ±10% while the valid range of all other rails is ±5%. Bring up
the M9018A soft front panel (SFP) to view the actual voltages. Note that
5Vaux is not displayed by the SFP. For additional troubleshooting information
regarding these voltage rails, see Chapter 17, “Troubleshooting Failure of the
Chassis to Power Up”.
534,”Non-volatile sel f test memory cache size is invalid. Cache repaired, please rerun sel f
test to validate repair.”
535,”Non-volatile self test memory cache checksum failure. Cache repaired,
please rerun self test to validate repair.”
536,”Non-volatile sel f test memory problem required re-initializing the memory.”
This comment applies to the three self test messages above. These self test
codes are unlikely to occur. Reboot your PC and then rerun self test. If these
codes repeat, service is required, contact Keysight Technical Support.
537,”Error detected during PCIe Switch Fabric configuration. Base (factory defaul t) PCIe
Switch Fabric was re-selected.”
This self test code is reported if the 1x8 (factory default) configuration has
been successfully restored after a previous failure of a configuration attempt.
Reboot your PC and use the soft front panel to verify that the 1x8 PCIe link
configuration is active. Then rerun self test. If this code repeats, service is
required, contact Keysight Technical Support.
538,”Load Base Configuration Pushbutton press was latched. Power cycle chassis to clear
latch, and then reboot the system controller.”
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
137
Troubleshooting Based on the Self Test Results
See “Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base Configuration” on
page 87 for a description of this pushbutton and the associated latch. Perform
a hard reset as described in “Performing a chassis hard reset” on page 28 and
then rerun self test. If this code repeats, service is required, contact Keysight
Technical Support.
539,”Currently loaded PCIe Switch Fabric has no revision information”
This message indicates that the chassis driver does not recognize the current
PCIe Switch Fabric. For example, the chassis may contain a custom fabric that
has been installed with the assistance of Keysight. This self test code will
continue to be reported until a PCIe Switch Fabric is installed that is
recognized by the chassis driver.
138
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
22
Troubleshooting M9018A System
Turn On Issues
This chapter describes the major hardware components, software components,
and configuration settings of a M9018 system, and describes their expected or
recommended states. This information is provided for two purposes:
- To supplement the turn on instructions provided in the M9018A Startup Guide
in case you haven’t been able to turn on your system using that information.
- This information can also be used to troubleshoot system issues—for example,
a situation where the host controller PC was previously able to communicate
to the chassis but no longer can. By comparing the current state of the
system to the expected or recommended state, you should be able to identify
the problematic area and determine the action required to restore operation.
If your chassis appears to be inoperative—for example, the front panel LEDs
don’t illuminate when you attempt to turn on the chassis—please begin with
Chapter 16, “Troubleshooting the M9018A System”. That chapter provides an
overview of the troubleshooting process, and references information such as
how to troubleshoot a chassis that won’t turn on and how to troubleshoot a
chassis where the fans aren’t rotating. These issues, if present, need to be
resolved before using this chapter to turn on the host PC/chassis system.
Even if the M9018A system can’t be immediately turned on (or restored) based
on the information in this chapter, methodically looking at each system
component will usually identify an area for further investigation. For example,
looking at the Windows Device Manager view of the chassis will allow you to
determine if the chassis was properly enumerated by the BIOS during booting of
the PC. Troubleshooting suggestions are provided in case this doesn’t occur.
This chapter focuses on Keysight components, such as the M9048A Desktop
Adapter card and the M9021A Cable Interface module. However, the information
should be generally applicable to other interface components.
When you press the chassis power-on button, if the chassis does not power up
and the front panel LEDs do not light, it is possible for the chassis to be in a
safety shutdown state. Remove the chassis AC power cord from the chassis for
one minute. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the chassis again. If it still
does not power on, refer to the troubleshooting information elsewhere in this
manual.
139
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
M9018A system components and settings
M9018A system components and settings
This section summarizes the key hardware components, software components,
and configuration settings of a M9018A system. These are shown in Figure 62.
Host Controller PC
((presumed
d on T
Tested
dC
Computer Li
List))
•
•
•
•
•
BIOS version
Version of Windows
IO Libraries Suite version
Chassis driver software version
PCIe slot types (lanes/speeds)
PCIe
adapter
card
PCIe cable
• Chassis Manager firmware
• Cable interface module (slot 1)
• Position of the power M9021 power slide switch
• PCIe link configuration
• Provision of a 10 MHz reference clock
• Installation of a system timing module
• FAN switch position on rear panel
position on rear p
panel
• INHIBIT switch p
• Inhibit signal on the rear panel DB-9 connector
• Modules installed (and the power
consumed by the modules)
Figure 62 Key software components, hardware components, and configuration
settings of a M9018A system
Successfully turning on a system involves dealing with many hardware and
software components, such as installing Keysight IO Libraries Suite and the
chassis driver software. In some situations, your BIOS will be fine as-is while, in
other situations, you’ll need to update your BIOS.
You may find that your PC contains multiple PCIe slots with a mix of different
speeds and different numbers of lanes. It is important to understand how to
select a particular PCIe slot for your PCIe adapter card.
This chapter discusses each of the primary system hardware and software
components. For each component, the actions that are required to configure
and/or validate the component are described. Issues that might arise with each
component are also described. This detailed information should allow you to find
and resolve issues preventing you from turning on your M9018A system.
The turn on procedures in this chapter do not include setting the chassis alarms
for the simple reason that, if you’re able to set the alarms (which is done from the
host controller PC), then the chassis system is turned on and working. However,
Keysight recommends, when the system is operational, that you regularly check
the chassis parameters monitored by the alarms (whether or not you actually use
the alarms themselves). This is to detect any parameters that are deviating from
their nominal values, which may provide an early indication of a issue that will
impact system operation in the future.
140
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A system components and settings
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
The primary hardware components, software components, and configuration
settings of the M9018A system are listed below, and follow the organization of
Figure 62 on page 140. Each item listed below affects operation of the system.
For certain items in your M9018A system, the current situation may be fine as-is
while, for other items, action may be required in order to turn on or restore
operation of the system.
The list below provides recommendations for each item. Subsequent sections
provide additional details on selected items.
1 Host controller PC—The host controller PC hardware and software that are
pertinent to functioning of the M9018A system are listed below. It is assumed
that you are using a computer on the Tested Computer List as described in
Chapter 1, “Introduction”.
– Version of the BIOS—The BIOS performs enumeration of the chassis slots
during booting. It is required to have a version of the BIOS that has been
verified to work. Even if your computer is on the Tested Computer List, it
may not have the required BIOS version. See the Tested Computer List for
details on the required BIOS version.
– Version of Windows—In general, Windows 7 is better than Windows XP at
identifying PCIe devices and associating Windows drivers with the
identified devices. Using Windows 7 is recommended.
- Version of Keysight IO Libraries Suite on the host controller PC—Keysight
recommends installing the latest version of IO Libraries Suite that is available.
- Version of the chassis drivers—Keysight also recommends installing the latest
version of the chassis drivers that are available.
- PCIe slots and speeds—It is important to be aware of how the PCIe slots are
implemented in your PC. It is not unusual to have a PCIe slot that is x4
electrically but is x8 mechanically. It is likewise not unusual to have such slots
run at Gen 1 speeds, not Gen 2 speeds. If you install a M9048A Desktop
Adapter card in such a slot (x4 electrically and Gen 1), it will run at 1/4 the
speed of the same adapter card installed in an x8 (electrically) Gen 2 slot.
– Adapter card installed in the host controller PC
– M9048A PCIe Desktop Adapter—In order to achieve full performance, this x8
card needs to be installed in a PCIe slot that is x8 (or greater, electrically)
and has Gen 2 performance.
– M9045 PCIe ExpressCard Adapter—This x1 card provides Gen 1 performance
Ensure that the M9045 PCIe ExpressCard Adapter is fully seated in the laptop
computer. Also ensure that the PCIe cable connectors, discussed next, are also
fully seated on both the PC and the chassis. You should hear an audible click
when the connector is fully seated.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
141
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
M9018A system components and settings
2 PCIe cable—As described in the M9018A Startup Guide (specifically, the
appendix providing chassis specifications), the PCIe cable connector and
receptacle mating cycles are limited to 250 cycles. Mating cycles beyond this
can impact system reliability.
3 M9018A chassis—The chassis hardware, software, and configuration settings
that affect operation of the M9018A system are listed below.
- Chassis Manager firmware—The Chassis Manager firmware controls operation of
the chassis. To determine if there is an update to the firmware, see “Chassis
firmware revision checking and installation” on page 34.
- M9021 Cable Interface module—This module is installed in slot 1 and provides a
1x8 PCIe interface to the chassis. The M9021A power slide switch on the
chassis backplane must be set to the correct position as described in section
Setting the M9021A power slide switch in the M9018A Startup Guide.
The M9021A is only compatible with the M9018A’s 1x8 PCIe fabric. The
M9021A interface has a single 1x8 link. If the M9021A is used with the
M9018A’s 2x8 or 4x4 fabrics, then only the 1st PCIe link of that fabric will be
connected. The following table shows what is typically seen on the host
controller when the M9021S is used with the M9018A’s PCIe fabrics:
Table 8 How the M9018A appears on host controller when using an M9021A Cable Interface
module
M9018A PCIe
Fabric
M9021A Link 1
connected to
M9018A slots
1x8
2 - 18
(all slots)
2x8
4x4
M9018A chassis device
connected and visible in
Windows Device Manager
In Connection Expert
M9018A only shows
under “Other Devices”

M9018A shows properly
as “Chassis <n>”

Original
Fabric
2-9
M9018A device not on link
1 so Windows does not find
M9018A device not on
link 1 so Windows does
not find
Rev. 21
2-9


Original
Fabric
10 - 14
M9018A device not on link
1 so Windows does not find
M9018A device not on
link 1 so Windows does
not find
Rev. 21
10 - 14


M9018A device not on
link 1 so Windows does
not find
M9018A device not on
link 1 so Windows does
not find
1 The Rev.2 fabrics are available when the PCIe Switch Fabric Configurator is used on M9018A chassis host controllers driver version 1.4.xxx.xxx
and later.
- PCIe link configuration—The default PCIe link configuration is 1x8. Using the
Configurator program, the chassis can be configured with 2x8 and 4x4 PCIe
link configurations.
142
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A system components and settings
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
- 10 MHz reference clock—Instead of using the internal 10 MHz reference clock,
an external 10 MHz reference clock can be provided through the rear panel
BNC connector.
- System timing module—A 3rd party system timing module can be installed in
slot 10, the system timing slot. If this module is present, the chassis uses its
10 MHz reference clock.
- FAN switch position on the rear panel—This switch controls whether the fans are
operating at maximum speed (HIGH switch position), or whether the fan
speeds are a function of the chassis temperature (AUTO switch position).
- MAN/DEF switch position on the rear panel—This switch controls whether the
chassis is powered up by the front panel ON/Standby pushbutton or the
Inhibit signal on the rear panel DB-9 connector. This switch and its affect on
powering up the chassis are described at length in “Troubleshoot the power
up hardware” on page 111.
- Inhibit signal on the rear panel DB-9 connector—Likewise, see “Troubleshoot the
power up hardware” on page 111 for details.
- Chassis power supply—The chassis power supply is customer-replaceable.
Troubleshooting of the power supply is described in Chapter 17,
“Troubleshooting Failure of the Chassis to Power Up”.
- Chassis fan assembly—The chassis fan assembly is customer-replaceable.
Troubleshooting of the fans is described in Chapter 18, “Troubleshooting Fan
Issues”.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
143
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
Host controller PC
Host controller PC
This section provides additional details on the host controller PC hardware and
software.
Tested computer list
In order for a PC to serve as a host controller, its BIOS must support enumeration
of the PCIe slots in the chassis; many computers are not capable of enumerating
a sufficient number of PCIe slots to ensure that slots in an external chassis are
enumerated.
Keysight provides the document “PCI and AXIe Modular Instrumentation Tested
Computer List Technical Note” which lists the embedded, desktop, laptop, and
rack-mounted PCs that have been verified to enumerate the PCIe slots in the
M9018A chassis. Please use this document, available under the Document Library
tab at www.keysight.com/find/M9018A, to guide your selection of remote
controller PCs. Also use this document to ensure that you have the latest BIOS
installed.
Keysight IO Libraries Suite and the chassis drivers
The table below shows the chassis driver releases and their compatibility with the
releases of Keysight IO Libraries Suite. The table is ordered by M9018A chassis
driver releases, with the most recent release lowest in the table.
Table 9
Chassis Drivers and IO Libraries Suite compatibility
M9018A Chassis Drivers Compatibility with Keysight IO Libraries Suite
M9018A Chassis Drivers
Version
IO Libraries Suite
Minimum Version
IO Libraries Suite
Version the Chassis Drivers were
Released With
1.0.1.3
16.0
16.0
1.2.1.x
16.2
16.2
1.3.x.1
16.2
16.3 update 1
1.4.3xx.xxx
16.3 update 1
16.3 update 2
Keysight recommends using the latest version of IO Libraries Suite available.
However, for those customers interested in using the version of IO Libraries Suite
that the M9018A chassis drivers were released with, that information is provided
in the above table.
144
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Host controller PC
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
PCIe slots and speeds
Host controller PC PCIe sockets are characterized by two attributes:
1 The physical size of the socket as indicated by the maximum number of PCIe
lanes that the socket is sized for, independent of how many lanes are actually
wired to the socket. For example, a socket physically sized for eight lanes is
referred to as an x8 socket.
2 The number of PCIe lanes electrically wired to the socket. For example, a
socket wired to four PCIe lanes is known as x4.
Although the nomenclature varies, a common nomenclature is to refer to the
socket size first followed by the number of lanes in parenthesis, often with
“mode” following the number of lanes. These parameters are then ascribed to
each PCIe slot in a computer. For example, an x8 socket that contains four
electrical lanes would be referred to as an “x8 (x4 mode) slot”.
x8 (x4 mode) slots are quite common in PCs. Such a slot will accommodate the
M9048A PCIe Desktop Adapter, which has eight lanes and is therefore designed
to mate with an x8 socket. However, because an x8 (x4 mode) slot only has four
active lanes, only four lanes (of the M9048A’s eight lanes) will actually be used.
This will provide half the PCIe bandwidth compared to operating the M9048A in
an x8 (x8 mode) slot.
Figure 63 (which is rotated 180 degrees so that the printed circuit board labels
can be read) shows a M9048A card installed in slot 3, an x8 (x4 mode) slot. This
particular PC only labels the number of active lanes (x4), not the mechanical
width of the slot (x8). Note the adjacent x16 (x16 mode) slot 4. Note also that slot
4 is labeled “PCIe2”, indicating that it is Gen 2. Because slot 3 is labeled “PCIe”,
one can infer that it is Gen 1.
Figure 63
An example PC’s x8 (x4 mode) and x16 (x16 mode) PCIe slots
By moving the M9048A card to the x16 (x16 mode) slot, the performance will be
four times as great. The performance will double because all eight lanes of the
M9048A card will be used, and the performance will double again because the
card will be in a Gen 2 slot, not a Gen 1 slot.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
145
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
M9018A chassis
M9018A chassis
This section provides additional details on the chassis hardware, software, and
configuration settings. Several Windows Device Manager views and Connection
Expert views of the chassis are also included in this section.
M9021A Cable Interface module
The M9021A Cable Interface module contains LEDs (both front panel and side or
PC board LEDs) that indicate how many PCIe lanes are actually being used to
communicate between the PC and the chassis. If your chassis application is
running slower than you expect, check the M9021A LEDs to see how wide your
data path is to the chassis. Each lane is denoted by one yellow LED.
If you remove a slot 2 module or filler panel to view the M9021A LEDs, ensure
that the module or filler panel is reinstalled. This is required to maintain chassis
cooling as well as minimize radio frequency interference.
The M9021A front panel has four LEDs to indicate the communication speed to
the host controller. The following table describes the LED indications:
146
Configuration to
Host PC
M9021A Front Panel LEDs
(see Figure 64)
PC Board (or side) LEDs
x1 PCIe Link
x4 Cable & x4 Chassis
Single pair yellow LEDS
(see Figure 65)
x4 PCIe Link
x4 Cable & x4 Chassis
4 pairs yellow LEDs
(see Figure 66)
x8 PCIe Link
x4 Cable & x4 Chassis &
x8 Cable & x8 Chassis
All 8 pairs yellow LEDs
(see Figure 67)
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A chassis
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
Figure 64
M9021A Front Panel LEDs
Figure 65 shows the LEDs that are illuminated for single lane (x1)
communications to the chassis, which is provided by the M9045 PCIe Express
Card Adapter. The left-most set of LEDs indicates the number of lanes
communicating to the chassis backplane, while the right-most set of LEDs
indicates the number of lanes communicating to the host PC.
M9021A Cable Interface Module
An ON LED indicates that the lane is active based on
the card detecting that the lane’s receiver is enabled.
7
6
5
4
BACK PLANE LANE DETECT
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
CABLE LANE DETECT
3
2
1
Lane number
0
Figure 65 Single lane communications between the host controller PC and the
chassis
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
147
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
M9018A chassis
Figure 66 shows the LEDs that are illuminated for x4 communications. An
example of four lane communications would be an eight lane M9048A PCIe
Desktop Adapter installed in an x8 (mode x4) slot.
M9021A Cable Interface Module
An ON LED indicates that the lane is active based on
the card detecting that the lane’s receiver is enabled.
7
6
5
4
BACK PLANE LANE DETECT
3
2
1
0
Figure 66
7
6
5
4
CABLE LANE DETECT
3
2
1
Lane number
0
x4 communications between the host controller and the chassis
Figure 67 shows the LEDs that are illuminated for x8 communications. An
example of eight lane communications would be an eight lane M9048A PCIe
Desktop Adapter installed in an x8 (mode x8) slot or in an x16 (mode x16) slot.
M9021A Cable Interface Module
An ON LED indicates that the lane is active based on
the card detecting that the lane’s receiver is enabled.
7
6
5
4
BACK PLANE LANE DETECT
3
2
1
0
Figure 67
148
7
6
5
4
CABLE LANE DETECT
3
2
1
Lane number
0
x8 communications between the host controller and the chassis
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A chassis
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
Troubleshooting issues indicated by the M9021A LEDs
Listed below are issues that might be indicated by the M9021A LEDs along with
recommendations for resolving the issues.
1 If you are using the M9048A PCIe Desktop Adapter but only four LEDs are
illuminated, see if the card is installed in a x8 (mode x4) slot in the host
controller PC. Such a slot will only provide four electrical lanes. Install the
card in a slot that supports at least eight lanes, such as an x8 (mode x8) slot
or an x16 (mode x16) slot.
2 The M9021A LEDs should always be symmetrical. For example, if four lanes
are active to the host PC, four lanes should also be active to the chassis. If the
LEDs are asymmetric, try replacing the PCIe adapter card in the host
controller PC. If the LEDs are still asymmetric, next try replacing the M9021A
module. If the LEDs are still asymmetric, the problem may lie with the chassis
itself, contact Keysight Technical Support.
Windows Device Manager and Connection Expert views of the PCIe
devices
This section presents the Windows Device Manager and Connection Expert views
of the configurations listed below. These views are provided to assist you in
sequentially bringing up the chassis and its modules by showing what to expect
at each of these steps:
1 The host controller PC without a PCIe adapter card installed
2 The host controller PC with a PCIe adapter card installed
3 The host controller PC with a PCIe adapter card installed which is connected
over a PCIe cable to an M9018A chassis
All Device Manager views were generated by selecting View > Devices by
connection within Device Manager.
Windows Device Manager contains the menu selection Actions > Scan for
hardware changes. Using this selection does not generate the same results as
the BIOS-performed enumeration that occurs during booting of the PC. The
enumeration process will ensure that all PCIe devices are found, whereas
scanning for hardware changes may not detect all PCIe configuration changes
that have been made. Therefore, the PC should always be rebooted whenever
the PCIe configuration is changed.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
149
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
M9018A chassis
Device Manager view without a PCIe adapter card installed in the PC
Figure 68 shows the devices displayed when no PCIe adapter card is installed in
the host PC. This particular host PC has two PCI Express Root Ports. The PCIe
adapter card, when installed, will be attached to PCI Express Root Port 1. Root
Port 2 is dedicated to a Broadcom Ethernet controller, and is not used for
interfacing to the chassis.
Figure 68
PCI Express root ports for a particular computer
Device Manager view with a PCIe adapter card installed in the PC
Figure 69 lists the devices displayed when a PCIe adapter card is installed but
without a connection to a chassis. As you can see, there is no PCIe hierarchy
below PCIe Express Root Port 1 — hence, this is unchanged from Figure 68.
Figure 69
150
Device Manager view with a PCIe adapter card installed
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A chassis
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
Device Manager and Connection Expert views of a connection to a
chassis
Figure 70 shows the devices displayed when a PCIe adapter card is
installed in the host PC, and a connection is made to the M9018A chassis.
Because the M9018A chassis drivers have been installed, Device Manager
recognizes and displays the chassis (arrow). However, the five circled
devices have yet to be identified by Windows because their drivers haven’t
been installed.
Figure 70 Windows Device Manager view of the chassis with five
unrecognized devices
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
151
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
M9018A chassis
Because Connection Expert retrieves its information from Windows, it likewise
doesn’t recognize the modules in the chassis, one of which is shown in
Figure 71.
Figure 71 Connection Expert indicates that the device driver needs to be
installed for this particular (slot 6) module.
The slot 6 module is an Keysight M9153A RF switch. The driver for this device
can be downloaded by starting at www.keysight.com/find/M9153A. After
downloading and installing this driver, Windows Device Manager now has the
following view of the chassis:
152
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A chassis
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
Figure 72
driver
Windows Device Manager after installation of the M9153A
Note that installation of the M9153A driver also satisfied the need for a
driver by three related Keysight switch cards. One module remains without
a driver assigned to it.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
153
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
M9018A chassis
In order to update Connection Expert’s view of the chassis system, the
Refresh All button needs to be clicked. After doing so, Connection Expert
now recognizes that the slot 6 module is a M9153A Switch Card. Clicking
Installed Software will show the software that has been installed for this
module.
Figure 73
Connection Expert’s view of the slot 6 M9153A Switch Card.
Troubleshooting based on the Windows Device Manager views
If the chassis appears as shown in Figure 70 on page 151, the chassis is
being properly enumerated by the BIOS as the PC boots. The next step, as
previously indicated, is to ensure that drivers are associated with each
identified device.
Association of a driver with each device also includes associating the
M9018A chassis driver with the chassis itself. The appearance of “M9018A
Chassis” in Figure 70 on page 151 (arrow) indicates that Windows has
associated the M9018A chassis driver with the chassis. If “M9018A
Chassis” doesn’t appear in Windows Device Manager, the most likely
154
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A chassis
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
cause is that Windows has not been able to associate a driver with the
chassis. Repairing or reinstalling the M9018A chassis driver is
recommended.
Even if the chassis itself isn’t recognized by Windows Device Manager, it is
still possible for your application programs to access the modules in slots
2-18. In this situation, you will not be able to run applications such as the
chassis SFP, but your module-specific applications can still be run.
However, if the host PC is unable to access chassis functionality such as
the temperature sensors and power supply voltages, you will not be able
to set chassis alarms or view the status of the chassis. Therefore, Keysight
recommends that the chassis be serviced in such situations.
If, instead of the chassis appearing in a manner similar to Figure 70 on
page 151, the chassis isn’t displayed by Windows Device Manager at all
(appearing like Figure 68 on page 150), there are a number of possible
causes, including failure of the following components:
- M9045 PCIe ExpressCard Adapter
- M9048A PCIe Desktop Adapter
- PCIe cable between the host PC and the chassis
- M9021A PCIe Cable Interface module
Keysight recommends replacing each of the above components one at a
time to see if that restores operation. If not, Keysight recommends that
you contact Keysight Technical Support to arrange servicing of the
chassis.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
155
Troubleshooting M9018A System Turn On Issues
156
M9018A chassis
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
23
Repairing the Chassis
This chapter describes how to order and replace the following two assemblies:
- Fan assembly—The fan assembly, shown in Figure 74, includes all three
chassis fans, which are attached to the rear panel. The fans are not
individually replaceable. All three fans are detached from the rear panel for
replacement, and the new fan assembly is attached to the rear panel.
Figure 74
Chassis fan assembly
- Power supply—The power supply, shown in Figure 75, is accessed from the
rear of the chassis by first removing the rear panel. The power supply has no
customer-serviceable parts, and is replaced as a complete unit.
Figure 75
Chassis power supply
157
Repairing the Chassis
Ordering the fan assembly and power supply
Only qualified, service-trained personnel who are aware of the hazards
invol ved shall remove the chassis rear panel or top cover. Al ways turn
the chassis off and d isconnect the power cord before removing the rear
panel or top cover. Upon reassembly, ensure that all cable connectors
are properly seated in their receptacles, and that the latching
mechanisms of all connectors are engaged.
Ordering the fan assembly and power supply
To order the fan assembly or power supply, start at:
www.keysight.com/find/parts
Enter “M9018” in the Find by Keysight Product dialog, click Find by Product, and then
click View Parts, as shown below:
Figure 76
Steps to find the fan assembly and power supply parts
The M9018A parts list page will be displayed. The power supply is listed as the
“PXIe Chassis Power Supply Assembly”, and the fan assembly is listed as the
“PXIe Chassis - Fan Kit”.
Tools that you’ll need
The following tools are needed to replace the fan assembly or power supply:
- Phillips #2 screwdriver, preferably magnetic tipped
- Torx T8 and T10 screwdrivers, preferably magnetic tipped.
- Supplemental lighting—You may find supplemental lighting beneficial to
better see inside the chassis after removing the rear panel. Supplemental
lighting is especially beneficial if you’re repairing a chassis installed in a rack.
158
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Important aspects of the repair process
Repairing the Chassis
- Digital multimeter (DMM) if you’re replacing the power supply—This is used to
verify primary earth ground continuity after the power supply is replaced. The
DMM can also be used to measure the four primary power supply rails after
the new power supply is installed.
Important aspects of the repair process
In replacing the fan assembly or the power supply, keep the following in mind:
1 The fan assembly and power supply can both be replaced while the chassis is
mounted in a rack and without removing the chassis top cover.*
2 Regardless of whether the fan assembly is being replaced or the power supply
is being replaced, the rear panel must be removed from the chassis first. The
fan assembly is attached to the rear panel, and the power supply is accessed
through the rear of the chassis after the panel is removed.
3 Once the rear panel is detached from the chassis, it is still connected by a
wiring harness. Support the rear panel to ensure that the wiring harness and
its connector are not subjected to the weight of the panel.
4 The nine screws that hold the rear panel in place and the six screws that hold
the power supply in place are identical and interchangeable—they are all M3 5
mm long screws.
Removing the rear panel
To remove the rear panel, perform the following steps:
1 Power down the chassis and remove the chassis power cord.
2 Remove the two rear feet of the chassis as shown in Figure 77. Each rear foot
is secured by two T8 Torx screws at the indicated locations.
Rear
Rear
foot
foot
Figure 77
Removal of the two rear feet
* Later chassis added two shipping screws on the sides of the chassis to secure the power supply. See
instructions on page 166.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
159
Repairing the Chassis
Removing the rear panel
In the next step, the nine screws which secure the rear panel to the chassis are
removed. After the screws are removed, the rear panel will be connected to the
chassis only by the fan assembly wiring harness. Ensure that the rear panel is not
allowed to fall from the chassis after the screws are removed, especially if the
chassis is mounted in a raised position such as in a rack. The wiring harness or
the wiring harness connector can be damaged by the force exerted by dropping
the panel.
3 Remove the 9 screws highlighted in Figure 78. Depending on your chassis,
these 9 screws may either be Phillips #2 or Torx T8.
These two screws attach
from the rear panel to
flanges that extend from
the chassis.
These two screws attach
from the rear panel to
flanges that extend from
the chassis.
Figure 78
160
The nine screws which secure the rear panel to the chassis
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Removing the rear panel
Repairing the Chassis
4 Next, slide the base of the rear panel out from the chassis as shown in
Figure 79.
As you perform the
f ll i procedure,
following
d
ensure
that the rear panel doesn’t
f ll especially
fall,
i ll if the
th chassis
h i
is elevated in a rack.
Slide the base of the rear
panel out from the chassis,
being careful as the chassis
passes over small protrusions
on the two BNC connectors.
Then lower the panel slightly
to make room for the fans to
clear the inside top of the
c ass s
chassis.
Figure 79
The base of the rear panel is slid out first
5 Pivot the top of the rear panel outward from the chassis, and lower the rear
panel down next to the chassis as shown in Figure 80. At this point, the rear
panel is only connected to the chassis by the fan assembly wiring harness and
its connector.
The rear panel is still attached
t the
to
th chassis
h i b
by th
the ffan
assembly wiring harness, so
ensure that the rear panel is
supported after its removal.
Figure 80
Removal of the rear panel
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
161
Repairing the Chassis
Removing the rear panel
6 Next, lay the rear panel flat in a supported, stable position so that you can
disconnect the fan wiring harness from the power supply as shown in
Figure 81.
Power supply
pp y
Lay the rear panel/fan assembly in
a stable position so that you can
disconnect the fan wiring harness
connector from the power supply.
Figure 81 Positioning of the rear panel/fan assembly in preparation for
disconnecting the fan connector
7 Figure 82 shows the fan connector plugged into the power supply. Of the four
connectors which plug into the power supply, only the fan connector needs to
be removed in order to replace the fan assembly.
Fan connector
P
Power
supply
l
Figure 82
162
The fan connector is the top-most connector.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Removing the rear panel
Repairing the Chassis
In the next step, the fan connector is disconnected from the power supply. To
give yourself more room to grab the fan connector, you can optionally take the
chassis top cover off. If you do this, follow the cover removal procedure
presented in “Preemptively restoring the factory default 1x8 Base Configuration”
on page 87.
8 To remove the fan connector, grab it with your fingers while pressing the
release tab (shown below) with your fingernail. While continuing to press the
tab, rock the connector backward and forward in the vertical plane as you
pull. Removing the connector may require multiple attempts.
• Do not pull on the connector wires.
• Do not use tools to grab the connector body.
body
Press this tab with your fingernail to release
the connector catch mechanism, then pull
back on the connector body with your fingers
while rocking the connector forward and
backward in the vertical plane.
Do not rock the connector from side-to-side.
Figure 83 Rock the connector backward and forward while you press on the
release tab
If you’re replacing the fan assembly, continue with the next section to remove the
three fans from the rear panel, replace them with a new fan assembly, and install
the rear panel back in the chassis. If you’re replacing the power supply, set the
rear panel aside, and continue with “Replacing the power supply” on page 166.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
163
Repairing the Chassis
Replacing the fan assembly
Replacing the fan assembly
To replace the fan assembly, perform the following steps.
1 Lay the rear panel on a flat surface with the rear panel shown in Figure 84
facing up.
Figure 84
Remove these screws to detach the fan assembly
2 The fans are attached by screws that mount through the eyelets of the fan
guards. Remove the 12 screws highlighted in Figure 84 (note, some early
M9018A chassis used #2 Phillips screws, all later chassis used T8 Torx
screws). As you do this, note the orientation of the fan guards. The fan guards
are mounted with their eyelets flush with the rear panel. Note also the position
of the fan wiring harness—it is attached to the fan assembly proximate to the
lower right corner of the rear panel.
3 After removing the 12 screws, lift the rear panel off of the old fan assembly.
Lay your new fan assembly on your work surface in the same orientation as
your old fan assembly, relative both to the sides of the fans that are facing up
and the location of the fan wiring harness. For a rear panel positioned as
shown in Figure 84 on page 164, the fan assembly will be laid out as shown in
Figure 85.
164
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Replacing the fan assembly
Figure 85
Repairing the Chassis
The fan assembly prior to mating with the rear panel
4 Lay your rear panel on top of the new fan assembly. Align the holes in the rear
panel with the fan mounting holes.
5 Place the three fan guards on the rear panel over the fans, ensuring that the
fan guard mounting eyelets are flush with the rear panel.
In the next step, the rear panel will be attached to the new fan assembly using
the 12 screws you removed in step 2. These are thread forming screws, be
careful not to overtighten them.
6 Attach the fan guards and rear panel to the new fan assembly using the
screws removed in step 2. Be careful not to overtighten the screws, this can
strip the mounting holes in the fans.
7 Position the rear panel/fan assembly in the position shown in Figure 81, and
re-attach the fan connector. Ensure that the connector is fully inserted, and
that you hear an audible click upon insertion.
8 Mount the rear panel back in the chassis and insert the 9 screws shown in
Figure 78. Tighten these screws securely.
9 Attach the two rear feet shown in Figure 77, and tighten these screws
securely.
Verifying the fan assembly
To verify the fan assembly, connect the AC power cord, power up the chassis,
and confirm that all three fans are rotating. If they are not rotating, remove the
rear panel and make sure that the fan connector is fully seated in its power
supply connector. For further verification of the fan assembly, set the rear panel
FAN switch to AUTO followed by setting it to HIGH — confirm that the fan speed
increases as you change the switch.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
165
Repairing the Chassis
Replacing the power supply
Replacing the power supply
The power supply contains no user serviceable parts, and is replaced as a
complete assembly. Do not attempt to repair it.
Modifications have been made to the M9018A chassis power supply mounting.
Depending on which version of the chassis you have, the power supply
removal/installation procedure is slightly different; you may need to remove
two screws on the side of the chassis. Carefully follow the instructions below to
determine which version you have and follow the appropriate procedure.
To replace the power supply, carefully perform the following steps:
1 IMPORTANT! Check the serial number of the chassis:
a If the chassis serial number is TW54450000 or lower, there may be two
M4x8mm long socket head cap screws inside of the chassis top cover.
These two screws secure the power supply for shipping and must be
removed before attempting to remove the power supply. You must reinstall
these screws* before shipping the M9018A. Proceed to step 2 below.
b If your chassis has serial number TW54450001 or greater, there are two
M4x8mm long socket head cap screws accessible through holes in the
chassis top cover. These two screws secure the power supply for shipping
and must be removed before attempting to remove the power supply. If the
chassis has been rack mounted, these two screws have been previously
removed. You must reinstall these screws* before shipping the M9018A.
Proceed to step 3 on page 167.
2 If you have a chassis with serial number TW54450000 or lower, check for the
internal mounting screws. You must remove the chassis top cover first.
a Remove the 14 screws holding the top cover in place using a #2 Phillips
screwdriver. There are five screws on each side of the cover, two on top of
the cover near the front panel, and two in the back of the chassis that
screw into the chassis rear panel.
b After the screws are removed, lift up the rear of the chassis cover about 12
mm (0.5 inches) and slide the cover back off of the chassis. Place the cover
in a location away from the chassis.
c Locate and remove the two M4x8mm long cap screws securing the power
supply. There is one screw on each side of the chassis. See Figure 86
* Kit of two replacement screws is available as part number M9018-80019
166
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Replacing the power supply
Repairing the Chassis
below. Retain these screws as they will be needed when reassembling the
power supply and chassis.
d Proceed to step 4 on page 168.
Remove 2
screws.
One on
each side.
Figure 86 Remove two screws inside of chassis securing power supply
3 If you have a chassis with serial number TW54450001 or greater, do not
remove the chassis top cover. There are two M4x8mm long cap screws
accessible through holes in the chassis top cover. Refer to Figure 87 below. If
the chassis has been rack mounted, these two screws may have been
removed previously. You must reinstall these screws before shipping the
M9018A.
a Remove the two M4x8mm cap screws, one on each side of the chassis.
b Proceed to step 4 on page 168.
Remove
2
screws.
One on
Figure 87 Remove screws on side of chassis
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
167
Repairing the Chassis
Replacing the power supply
4 Remove the rear panel as described in “Removing the rear panel” on
page 159.
5 Next, remove the two connectors below the fan connector shown in
Figure 88.
Figure 88
Remove the two remaining power supply connectors
6 The top-most of the two connectors in Figure 88 uses the same retention
mechanism as the fan connector (see Figure 89).
Press this tab with your fingernail to release the
connector catch mechanism, then pull back on the
connector
co
ecto body with
t your
you fingers
ge s whilee rocking
oc g the
t e
connector forward and backward in the vertical plane.
Do not rock the connector from side
side-to-side.
to side
Figure 89
Remove the connector below the fan connector
To remove this connector, grab it with your fingers while pressing the release tab
shown above with your fingernail. While continuing to press the tab, rock the
connector backward and forward while pulling it until it releases.
168
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Replacing the power supply
Repairing the Chassis
7 Next, remove the white connector shown in Figure 90. This is accomplished
by pressing in with your fingers at the points shown below as you pull on the
connector.
To release this connector,
press in
i on th
the ti
tips (red
( d
arrows) of the lever arms
as you pull. This will pivot
th other
the
th ends
d off the
th arms
outward ((black arrows))
and release the connector.
Figure 90
Remove the bottom-most white connector
The connectors just removed in steps 3 and 4 above should be temporarily
tucked in below their cables on the chassis deck (the flat surface immediately
inside the rear of the chassis) so that the connectors and cables do not interfere
with the power supply as it is removed from the chassis or installed back in the
chassis.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
169
Repairing the Chassis
Replacing the power supply
8 Next, the AC power connector to the power supply is removed. To remove this
connector, press in on the tab shown in Figure 91 and pull the connector from
the power supply.
Power connector – This connector
carries power from the AC power
receptacle to the power supply.
supply
Press this tab at outward
end to release connector,
connector
then pull to disconnect.
Figure 91
Remove the power supply connector
9 The power supply is held in place by the six screws shown in Figure 92.
Remove these screws. At this point, the power supply should be ready to be
removed from the chassis — verify that all connectors and all screws have
been removed from the power supply.
Power Supply
pp y
Figure 92
170
Remove the six highlighted power supply screws
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Replacing the power supply
Repairing the Chassis
In the next step, the power supply is removed from the chassis. Earlier it was
noted that the two connectors that mate below the fan connector need to be
tucked in below their cables to keep them from interfering with the power
supply as it is removed. Likewise, the AC power wires need to be held down so
that the left-most tab of the power supply doesn’t make contact with these
wires.
10 Using the two handles on the power supply, slowly but firmly pull it out of the
chassis. There will be initial resistance prior to the main power connector to
the chassis releasing. As you pull the power supply out, ensure that the AC
power wires are held down so that the power supply doesn’t make contact
with these wires.
As you pull on the left handle, you can use a finger to simultaneously hold
down the AC power wires. Alternatively, you can enlist an assistant to hold
down the wires (using an object such as a screwdriver) as you pull the power
supply from the chassis by its two handles. In Figure 93, a screwdriver is being
used to hold down the AC wires as the power supply is pulled from the
chassis.
A screwdriver can be used to
hold down the AC power
wires so that the tab on the
power supply doesn’t
doesn t make
contact with them.
Figure 93 Using a screwdriver to hold down the AC power wires as the power
supply is removed
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
171
Repairing the Chassis
Replacing the power supply
11 Figure 94 shows the power supply after removal. The power supply contains
no serviceable parts, and should be disposed of as described in Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC on page iv.
Figure 94
172
The power supply after removal
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Replacing the power supply
Repairing the Chassis
Installing the new power supply
To install the new power supply, perform the following steps:
As you slide the power supply in, use the same precautions you used previously
to press the AC connector and AC wires down. Without the appropriate
precautions, the AC connector and wires can get caught between the power
supply and the base that the power supply mounts on. Also ensure that the two
connectors previously connected to the right side of the power supply are still
tucked in below their cables.
1 Slide the power supply in the chassis, ensuring that the six guide pins on each
side of the power supply are aligned in the channel inside each side of the
chassis—see Figure 95.
Four of six
guide
id pins
i
Slide guide
pins into this
channel
Figure 95
Slide the power supply in using the guide pins to align it
2 Using the power supply handles, push the power supply in until you feel the
power connector on the reverse, right side of the power supply engage with
the chassis connector. Continue firmly pushing until the power supply
connector is fully seated in the chassis connector, at which point the six
power supply tabs will be flush with the base that the power supply mounts
on.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
173
Repairing the Chassis
Replacing the power supply
3 Insert the six screws shown in Figure 92 and tighten securely.
4 Reconnect the following four connectors:
a Reconnect the small, black connector shown in Figure 89. Ensure that the
connector is fully inserted, and that you hear an audible click upon
insertion.
b Next, reconnect the white connector shown in Figure 90. Push firmly to
engage. Note that this connector will not make an audible click.
c Reconnect the AC power connector shown in Figure 91. Push firmly and
ensure that you hear an audible click upon insertion.
d Position the rear panel/fan assembly in the position shown in Figure 81,
and re-attach the fan connector. Ensure that the connector is fully
inserted, and that you hear an audible click upon insertion.
The following steps verify continuity of grounds between the power supply and
the chassis primary earth ground, and between the power supply and the
primary earth ground conductor on the rear panel AC power connector. These
steps shall be performed only by qualified, service-trained personnel.
5 To verify continuity of earth grounds, use a digital multimeter (DMM) set to
the 10-20 ohms scale. Place one DMM probe anywhere on the power supply
enclosure. Place the other DMM probe on the points described below, and
confirm that the resistance measurements are 0.1 or less.
174
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Replacing the power supply
Repairing the Chassis
a The primary earth ground connection on the chassis deck as shown below.
Primary earth
ground connection
on chassis desk
Figure 96 Measure the resistance from the power supply enclosure to the
primary earth ground connection on the chassis deck.
b The primary earth ground conductor on the rear panel AC power connector
as shown in Figure 97.
Figure 97
The ground conductor on the rear panel AC power connector
6 Following the reverse of the procedure you used to remove the rear panel,
re-attach the rear panel to the chassis, and attach the 9 screws shown in
Figure 78. Tighten these screws securely.
Power supply side mounting screws
7 If you have a chassis with serial number TW54450001 or greater and you are
not rack mounting the chassis, reinstall the two M4x8mm long cap screws on
the side of the chassis. If you are rack mounting the chassis, do not install the
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
175
Repairing the Chassis
Replacing the power supply
screws. Refer to Figure 87 on page 167 for the location of these screws.
Proceed to step 9 below.
The M4x8mm long socket head cap screws must be in place before shipping the
chassis. Tighten these screws to 18 inch-lbs (20.7 KG-cm). A kit of two
replacement screws is available as part number M9018-80019
8 If you have a chassis with serial number TW54450000 or lower, and IF THE
SCREWS WERE PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED (some early chassis did not have
the power supply mounting screws on the side of the chassis), you must
reinstall the two screws on the inside of the chassis before reinstalling the
chassis top cover.
If the chassis did not have the side mounting screws, you do not need to
install them.
a Reinstall the two M4x8mm long cap screws securing the power supply.
There is one screw on each side of the chassis. See Figure 86 on page 167.
The M4x8mm long socket head cap screws must be in place before shipping the
chassis. Tighten these screws to 18 inch-lbs (20.7 KG-cm). Kit of two
replacement screws is available as part number M9018-80019
b Reinstall the chassis top cover and the 14 screws.
c Proceed to step 9 below.
9 Attach the two rear feet shown in Figure 77, and tighten all screws securely.
Verifying the power supply
To verify the power supply, connect the AC power cord, power up the chassis,
and verify that the three front panel LEDs behave as described in Chapter 19,
“Troubleshooting Flashing of the Front Panel LEDs”. Confirm also that the three
rear panel fans are rotating.
Additional verification can be performed by using the DMM to measure the
voltages on the rear panel DB9 connector as described in “Measuring the four
main voltage rails directly” on page 18, or by bringing up the M9018A soft front
panel and viewing the voltages of the four main power supply rails.
176
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
A
How to Return the Chassis to
Keysight
1 If your chassis is being returned for service, review your chassis warranty
information. This can be found online by going to:
www.keysight.com/find/warranty and entering your product number
(M9018A) and your serial number. The serial number is on a tag affixed to the
rear of the chassis, and can also be read using the soft front panel after the
chassis software is installed.
2 Contact Keysight to obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) and
shipping address. For Keysight contact information, go to
www.keysight.com/find/assist (worldwide contact information for repair and
service) or refer to the Support information on the product web page at
www.keysight.com/find/pxi-chassis. When you contact Keysight, you will
typically be assigned a case ID number—please be sure to retain this number.
3 Write the following information on a tag and attach it to the chassis:
– Name and address of owner. A P.O. box is not an acceptable address.
– Product model number (for example, M9018A)
– Product serial number (for example, TWnnnnnnnn). The serial number
label is located on the back of the chassis. The serial number can also be
read from the Soft Front Panel, but only if the chassis is operational and
the Soft Front Panel software is installed on the host controller.
IMPORTANT: Keep a copy of the serial number for your records.
4 If the chassis is being returned for service, please print and fill out the Failure
information sheet on the next page. This information can expedite repair of the
chassis. When you’re done, tape the sheet to the top of the chassis.
5 Remove and retain all modules and slot covers from the chassis, including the
slot 1 module. This module is typically an embedded controller or a PCIe
cable interface module.
6 Carefully pack the chassis in its original packaging. If the original packaging is
not available, use bubble wrap or packing peanuts, and place the chassis in a
sturdy, sealed container and mark the container “FRAGILE”.
7 On the shipping label, write ATTENTION REPAIR DEPARTMENT and the RMA
number provided by Keysight in step 2.
Keep a copy of the chassis serial number, your Keysight-assigned case ID
number, and the RMA number for your records. Provide these numbers in any
future communications along with the chassis model number (M9018A).
177
How to Return the Chassis to Keysight
Failure information
Failure information
If the M9018A chassis is being returned for service, please print this page and
provide as much of the information below as possible to expedite the repair of
your chassis. After filling out this page, please tape it to the top of the chassis.
Was the chassis initially functional and then it failed, or did it never work?
_______________________________________________________________________
Failure symptoms:
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Is the failure consistent or intermittent?
________________________________________________________________________
If the chassis fails consistently but works some time before it fails, how long does
it work before the failure occurs?
______________________________________________________________________
What is the status of the three front panel LEDs?
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Did Connection Expert display the chassis slots?
_______________________________________________________________________
Were you able to use the soft front panel (SFP) with the chassis?
_______________________________________________________________________
If you were able to use the SFP, what information did it display for example, on
the Monitor tab) that may help with repair?
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
If you were able to use the SFP to run its self test, what failure codes, if any, did it
display?
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Module plugged into slot 1, the system controller slot:
_____________________________________________________________________
Model of PCIe Desktop Adapter or PCIe ExpressCard
Adapter if you’re using a remote controller PC:
_____________________________________________________________________
Model of timing card, if any, plugged into slot 10, the system timing slot:
_______________________________________________________________________
178
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
Failure information
How to Return the Chassis to Keysight
Operating system of the host controller PC, including service pack information:
_______________________________________________________________________
Please provide any other information that might assist in the repair of your
chassis:
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Thank you for providing this information.
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
179
How to Return the Chassis to Keysight
180
Failure information
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
B
Chassis and Accessory Model
Numbers
Table 10 lists the model number of the chassis and its accessories. Information
on these parts can be found by starting at www.keysight.com/find/pxi-chassis.
Table 10 Chassis and accessory model numbers
M9018A
PXIe Chassis: 18 slot, 3U, 8 GB/s
opt 900-931
Power cord options
Option
900
901
902
903
904
906
912
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
927
930
931
Power Cord Description
United Kingdom, BS 1363/A male plug
Australia and New Zealand, AS 3112 male plug
Continental Europe, CEE 7 male plug
U.S. and Canada, NEMA 5-15P male plug - 120V
U.S. and Canada, NEMA 6-15P male plug - 240V
Switzerland, SEV Type 12 male plug
Denmark, SR 107-2-D male plug
India, IEC 83-B1 male plug
Japan, JIS C8303 male plug
Israel, Israel SI 32 male plug
Argentina, IRAM 2073 male plug
Chile, CEI 23-16 male plug
China, GB 1002 (figure 3) male plug
South Africa, SANS 164-1 male plug
Thailand, Philippines NEMA 5-15P 250 male plug
Brazil, NBR 14136 male plug
Taiwan, CNS 10917-2 male plug
M9021A
PCIe Cable Interface module (x8)
M9045
PCIe ExpressCard Adapter (x1)
M9048A
PCIe Desktop Adapter (x8)
Y1200A
PCIe cable: x4 to x8, 2.0m (for use with M9045)
Y1202A
PCIe cable: x8, 2.0m (for use with M9048A)
Y1212A
Slot Blocker Kit
Y1213A
PXI EMI Filler Panel Kit: 5 single-slot
Y1214A
Air Inlet Module Kit
Y1215A
Rack Mount kit for the M9018A
Part No.
8120-8620
8120-8619
8121-2221
8121-1713
8120-8623
8121-1765
8121-1786
8121-0710
8121-1763
8121-0161
8121-1857
8121-1084
8121-1766
8121-0710
8121-1764
8121-1787
8121-1853
181
Chassis and Accessory Model Numbers
182
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
C
Chassis Temperature Parameters
Figure 98 lists several chassis temperature parameters, including the operating
temperature range, the storage temperature range, and various temperature
thresholds.
Default Maximum Temperature Alarm Threshold for the eight chassis temperature sensors
70 °C (the hottest of the eight sensors). This is also the upper limit for this threshold.
65 °C The highest that MaxRPMTemperature can be set
55 °C
50 °C
45 °C
The default MaxRPMTemperature where
the fans will reach maximum RPM
Ambient air temperature where
power supply derating begins
Ambient air
operating
temperature
Chassis
storage
p
temperature
25 °C
The default temperature at which the fan
speeds will begin ramping up.
If the rear ppanel Fan Speed
p
Selector
Switch is set to AUTO, the default
operation is that the fan speeds will
begin ramping up at the lower
temperature (25 °C) and will achieve
maximum speed at the upper
temperature, MaxRPMTemperature
(50 °C).
This is also the lowest that MaxRPMTemperature can be set
1 °C This is the lowest that the Maximum Temperature Alarm Threshold can be set
0 °C Lower limit for chassis self test – temperatures below this will report a self test error
This is also the temperature
p
that the fans will begin
g ramping
p g upp at the lowest
MaxRPMTemperature setting of 25 °C.
–40 °C
Figure 98
Key chassis temperature parameters
183
Chassis Temperature Parameters
184
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
Index
Numerics
PXI_TRIG, 64
10 MHz Reference Clock, 59
10MHz Reference Clock,
IVI-C, 63
10MHz Reference Clock,
IVI-COM, 62
1x8 Base Configuration, 87
1x8 Link Configuration, 70
2-Link Configuration, 70
2x8 Link Configuration, 70
4-Link Configuration, 70
4x4 Link Configuration, 70
K
D
Keysight IO Libraries Suite, 23,
144
Diagram, block, 4
E
electrostatic discharge, 8
ESD, 8
F
A
Abnormal fan behavior, 103
Alarm architecture, 35
Alarm Occurred, 37
Alarm, power-on default, 38
Alarms, chassis, 105
Alarms, troubleshooting, 127
B
Block Diagram, 6
Block diagram, 4
C
Chassis alarms, 105
Chassis Cooling, 19
Chassis doesn’t power up, 103
Chassis firmware, 7
Chassis hard reset, 28
Chassis internal 10 MHz
clock, 59
Chassis maintenance and
inspection, 7
Chassis Management, 29
Chassis revision, 33
Chassis Self Test, 92
Chassis Temperature, 45
Chassis Temperature Profile, 50
Chassis temperatures, 126
Computer list, tested, 144
Configurator program, 75
Configurator utility, 75
IVI Foundation, 29
IVI-COM, fan speed
monitoring, 43
Configuring PXI Trigger Bu,
IVI-C, 69
Configuring PXI Trigger Bus,
IVI-COM, 68
Connection Expert, 149
Fabric settings, master
chassis, 72
Fabric settings, secondary
chassis, 73
Fan assembly, 157
Fan assembly, replacing, 164
Fan Issues,
troubleshooting, 115
Fan Speed, 50
Fan speed monitoring, IVI-C, 44
Fan speed monitoring,
IVI-COM, 43
Fan speeds, 7
Fan, abnormal behavior, 103
Firmware, chassis, 7, 33
Front panel LEDs, 37, 104
Front panel LEDs, flashing, 119
Fuses, internal, 17
H
Hard reset, 28
Host controller PC, 144
Host PC can’t
communicate, 106
I
Inhibit input signal, 112
Inhibit switch, 111
Internal fuses, 17
IVI drivers, 34
IVI drivers configure trigger
bus, 66
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
L
LEDs, front panel, 37
Limit, voltages, 38
M
M9021A Cable Interface
module, 146
M9021A/B, 72
M9036A PCIe Embedded
Controller, 72
MAN/DEF switch position, 143
Master chassis fabric
settings, 72
Maximum power available, 13
Measuring primary voltage
rails, 11
Measuring voltage rails, 18
Module handling procedures, 8
Monitoring 10MHz reference
clock, 59
Monitoring 3.3V rail, 11, 17
Monitoring Fan Speeds, 41
Monitoring the Power
Supply, 54
Multi-chassis configurations, 1,
72
Multiple chassis, 1, 72
Multiple chassis
configurations, 72
O
ON/Standby pushbutton, 112
Out-of-limits power supplies,
troubleshooting, 125
Over temperature
protection, 11, 14
Overcurrent protection, 11, 16
185
M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis
User Guide
P
P2P, 74
PC startup events, 23
PCIe Link Configuration, 70
PCIe slots and speeds, 145
PCIe Switch Fabric, 70
PCIe Switch Fabric
Configurator, 75
Peer-to-Peer, 74
Power calculator
spreadsheet, 16
Power sequence
requirements, 22
Power supplies,
troubleshooting
out-of-limit, 125
Power supply, 157
Power supply capacity, 11, 13
Power Supply Operation, 11
Power supply voltage limits, 38
Power supply voltages, 7, 12
Power supply, replacing, 166
Power Up, troubleshooting, 107
Power-on default alarm, 38
PXI Trigger Bus, 64
R
Rack Mounting, 19
Rear panel 10 MHz clock, 59
Rear panel INHIBIT switch, 111
Repairing the Chassis, 157
Replacing fan assembly, 164
Replacing power supply, 166
Reset, hard, 28
Return Chassis to Keysight, 177
S
Secondary chassis fabric link
settings, 73
Selecting Link
Configuration, 72
Self Test, 92
Self test, 106
Self test codes and
messages, 95
Self test, IVI drivers, 93
Self test, troubleshooting, 129
Setting the temperature,
IVI-C, 53
Setting the temperature,
IVI-COM, 52
Short circuit protection, 11, 16,
17
Single or master chassis fabric
settings, 72
Soft Front Panel, 54
Soft Front Panel alarm
thresholds, 39
Soft Front Panel, chassis
revision, 33
Soft Front Panel, trigger bus
connections, 65
Switch Fabric Configurator, 75
Switch fabric, PCIe, 70
System restart, 27
System timing slot, 59
System Turn On Issues,
troubleshooting, 139
Voltage monitoring, ICI-C, 58
Voltage monitoring,
ICI-COM, 57
Voltage rails, 11, 12
W
Windows Device Manager, 149
T
Temperature derating, 11, 15
Temperature Parameters, 183
Temperature, monitoring, 45
Tested computer list, 144
Threshold Exceeded, 37
Trigger Bus, PXI, 64
Troubleshoot ON/Standby
pushbutton, 112
troubleshooting, 126
Troubleshooting Chassis
Alarms, 127
Troubleshooting fan issues, 115
Troubleshooting M9018A, 99
Troubleshooting turn on, 139
Troubleshooting, chassis
temperatures, 126
U
Updating firmware, 33
V
Verify AC power, 111
Voltage Limit, 38
Voltage monitoring, 56
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
186
Index
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
187
www.keysight.com/find/mykeysight
A personalized view into the information most relevant to you.
www.axiestandard.org
Advanced TCA® Extensions for Instrumentation and Test (AXIe) is an open
standard that extends the Advanced TCA for general purpose and
semiconductor test. Keysight is a founding member of the AXIe consortium.
www.lxistandard.org
LAN eXtensions for instruments puts the power of Ethernet and the Web inside
your test systems. Keysight is a founding member of the LXI consortium.
www.keysight.com
www.keysight.com/find/modular
www.keysight.com/find/pxi-switch
For more information on Keysight Technologies’
products, applications or services, please contact
your local Keysight office. The complete list is
available at: www.keysight.com/find/assist
For other unlisted Countries:
www.keysight.com/find/contactus
www.pxisa.org
PCI eXtensions for Instrumentation (PXI) modular instrumentation delivers a
rugged PC-based high-performance measurement and automation platform.
www.keysight.com/find/ThreeYearWarranty
Keysight’s combination of product reliability and three-year warranty coverage
is another way we help you achieve your business goals: increased confidence
in uptime, reduced coat of ownership and greater convenience.
Keysight Assurance Plans
Keysight Advantage Services
www.keysight.com/find/AssurancePlans
Five years of protection and no budgetary surprises to ensure your instruments
are operating to specifications and you can continually rely on accurate
measurements.
www.keysight.com/quality
Keysight Electronic Measurement Group DEKRA Certified ISO 90001:2008
Quality Management System
Keysight Channel Partners
www.keysight.com/find/channelpartners
Get the best of both worlds: Keysight’s measurement expertise and product
breadth, combined with channel partner convenience.
188
Keysight M9018A PXIe 18-Slot Chassis User Guide
This information is subject to change
without notice
© Keysight Technologies 2014
Edition 7 September 2014
*M9018-90001*
M9018-90001
www.keysight.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising